AOL File Library: 4,101 to 4,200/aol-file-protocol-4400-4101-to-4200.zip/AOLDLs/General Buddhist Library/JeungSanDo_The Road to Awakening/ROAD.txt

Text File | 2014-11-30 | 381KB | 8,192 lines

One individual's search for self identity leads him not only to
self-awareness but to Religious awakening and a true illumination.

Autobiographical in nature, this book probes into today's problems
of identity in a multicultural society and comes to an enlightened
solution that can truely resolve all conflicts among humanity.

Enjoy.

[e-mail]    tel: [phone].
Please let me know what you think of the book.  Thanks.




                    The Road to Awakening









                                      By JaeNam Kim


Prayer from the Heart

JeungSan SangJeNim!
You are the ever Renewing God, the Maitreya,
the Ruler of Earth and Heaven
who have incarnated into this human world
from the Heavenly Throne
in order to open the Coming New Age of Peace and Harmony.
TaeMoNim!
You are the mother of all life on Earth and Heaven
in this time of New Beginning.

I wish to be a righteous and sincere JeungSan Do Worker.
Please forgive sins and misdeeds of my previous lives.
I repent sins and misdeeds of this life.
Free me from the wrath of vengeful spirits and evil intentions.
Let our forefathers rest in peace by fulfilling their wishes.
And show my ancestors and descendants
to the New Path of the Coming Justice.

After the period of hardships and relief,
the impending time of disaster is near at hand.
I will save my parents, brothers and sisters.
I will stand firmly above an unyielding faith
through the utmost devotions and respects.
Following the Law of Returning to the Origin
I will meditate with a single will the life-giving Truth
that unifies the role of Sovereign, Master and Father.
I will save the suffering mankind and lead them
to the coming fifty thousand years of the Cosmic Fall Time.
May your Holy Grace shine upon my path
toward the Truth of JeungSanDo.



       *     "Sleep less and read Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting.  It is
       the Supreme King of Heaven.  For fifty thousand years
       Tae-Ul-Ju shall be read by all schools on earth."

       *     "I have tested Tae-Ul-Ju chanting and Woon-
       Jang-Ju Chanting.  You shall practice them daily.  I have
       resolved the disaster of ByungWook Kim with Tae-Ul-
       Ju and the trouble of HyuSoon Chang with Woon-Jang-
       Ju.  Tae-Ul-Ju shall open the gate of salvation even if
       you have violated the law of nature and Woon-Jang-Ju
       shall open the prison gate even if you are convicted for
       murder."

       *     "No matter what you chant it is good as long as
       you have faith in that chanting."


                   The Lord JeungSan SangJeNim.





             The New Religion for a New Age


CONTENTS



Page

1            The Calling

6            'Chusuk' Feast

16           American Embassy

22           Brooklyn

25           High School

29           Mrs. Robinson

31           Dear John

39           'TaeUlJu' Meditation

61           The JeungSan SangJeNim and His New
             Government in Heaven

70           Spirit Journey

85           Ten-dimentional Super String Theory

95           Trip to Washington







104          The Hopis and the Secret of the Cosmic Cycle of
             Time

130          L.A. Jail

144          Visit to JeungSanDo Temple

151          Lecture on the Coming Cosmic Fall Time by the
             Master Teacher

162          My Spiritual Birthday

165          Manifestation of the Restructuring of Spiritual
             Order on Earth

181          Spirit Soldiers

183          The Awakened One

203          The Mission


       Acknowledgements


       Much of this book is based on the Korean book The Truth of
JeungSan Do.  I sincerely wish this book does justice to the
original
book.  Someday soon I hope the American readers will have the
chance to read the direct translation of the original book.

       I also owe much debt to following authors' pioneering books
whose materials I have used extensively throughout this book.

Lectures on the I-Ching by Richard Wilhelm.
The Path of the Pole by Charles H. Hapgood.
Beyond Einstein by Dr. Michio Kaku and Jennifer Trainer.
The Sumerians; Their history, culture and characters by Samuel Noah
Kramer.
Book of the Hopi by Frank Waters.
The Autobiography of Malcolm X by Alex Haley.
All God's Children Need Traveling Shoes by Maya Angelou.

Especially on books Beyond Einstein, Book of the Hopi and The
Autobiography of Malcolm X, I have taken the liberty of extensively
using their materials in this book.  If there were any
misrepresentations
on the above authors' works, they are entirely due to my
shortcomings.

       I thank Mr. Darin Dufford for his extensive editing work on
this book.




                                JaeNam Kim
                                March 12, 1992Chapter 1   The Calling.


      I was a thirteen year-old boy lying on a beach
in Korea on a deep, dark night, looking up at the
stream of stars, wondering, why.  The night was
enchanting.  Only one or two houses with thatch-roofs
and earthen walls reminded me of human presence.
The mating song of owls harmonized the rhythm of the
night.  The night air filled with the ancient smell of
seaweed tickled my nose.  The full moon was in the
ocean making many tiny waves, shining like gold.  In
the midst of the moon stood an island in the shape of a
snake's head; beyond it another island in the shape of a
dragon's tail emerged from the ocean moon.  The
crawling snake's head broke the waves into a million
tiny pieces of moon.  The rising dragon's tail pierced
the stream of stars in the sky, causing the stars to fall
one by one, dragging their tails in the night horizon.
They fell all around me on the beach.
      A larger wave swept over the crawling snake's
head and one piece of the ocean's golden moon broke
away from the rest.  Riding the wave, it came ashore.
Jumping with joy, it turned into a young girl.  She
danced around, gathering fallen stars.  Her hair, wavy
like the waves, shined like the golden moon.  Whenever
she turned her head, droplets of the golden moon
dripped away from her hair into the night horizon.
Her face was pale under the moonlight.  Her lips were
smiling;  her smile remained in the air even after her
lips were gone.  Expressing clearly what pleased her
and what did not, her eyes mischievously judged
everything in sight.  She was dressed in faded away
army fatigues, appearing as if she were wrapped in
falling autumn leaves.  Her body blossomed with joy.
She wiggled her hips according to the rhythm of the
waves, which she paced with her hand by hitting her
hips.  Suddenly noticing my gaze, she became startled
and missed a beat.  Blushing, she turned around coyly
while tenderly grasping the mid-air with her fingers.
She looked sideways at me and then held her hand out
toward me with her palm up.  Her fingers curled in,
gesturing me to follow her.  Enchanted, I got up.
      I was being drawn into her.  Noticing my
helplessness, her eyes sparkled with joy.  Holding my
hand gently she led me into the ocean.  The water was
cold and slippery.  The waves swayed me back and
forth.  She turned around and looked into my eyes.  A
shadow of death passed by her forehead.  Then I fell
into her eyes.  I entered into her death.  Without protest
I followed her into the bottom of the ocean, engulfed
by her death and captivated by her joy.  The sea water
was all around me.  I breathed in the water; the salty
and dense fluid played around in my lungs.  My chest
heaved up and down according to my motion.  Bubbles
of water came out from my nose.  The moon, the stars
and the snake-dragon creature were held above my
head as if a child had pasted cut-out drawings up
there.
      Crossing the ocean terrains, we came to a spot
where different currents met.  It formed a whirlpool,
spinning endlessly.  The column of the whirlpool
swirled up from the ocean floor.  Turning toward me,
she spoke.  Her words formed bubbles which burst in
my ears, ringing my head gently with her words.
"Enter the whirlpool from the northeastern direction.  I
shall enter it from the western direction."  I hesitated,
not knowing which direction was northeast.  Noticing
my hesitation, she told me the northeastern point of
the whirlpool was where the ocean mountain reached
its highest peak.  I circled the whirlpool and came to
the highest summit of the ocean terrain.  The whirlpool
swirl was calmer there.  I plunged into the swirl.  To
my surprise I tumbled down the slope of the mountain.
Inside the whirlpool, there was no water.  The
moonlight reflected inside swirl of the whirlpool and
the whole place had a golden glow.  At the foot of the
mountain there was a pond.  The pond stretched into
the center of the whirlpool from the ocean floor.
      Surprisingly, the pond was calm.  The surface
gently reflected my shadow,  from which the young
girl emerged from the pond.  Her hair was undulating,
her facial expression tenderly yielding, yet her hands
and legs showed strength, firmly holding her body and
mind.  Smiling cautiously, she spoke.  "My name is Tae.
I am the Maiden of the West.  I am the smiling mouth.
I am the blossoming flower.  I am joyous.  I am the
time of harvest:  autumn.  I am also the time of
judgment.  When the time of judgment comes all
human cultures from all over the globe look upon me
to celebrate my blossom.  They flock to me to flower.
All of human civilization eagerly take on the culture
of the nation of the West in order to prosper and to
multiply in plenitude.  Yet I am sad because in the
midst of the blossoms, I cannot find fruits.  When my
time comes, my joyousness needs to bear fruits.  When
the judgment time comes, there shall be harvests.
Those who bear fruits shall be harvested, and only
those who are harvested shall be able to enter the time
of autumn.  In my search to bear fruits, I inquired the
Mother Earth as to where I can find fruits to my
Joyousness.  The Mother Earth told me in order for me
to bear fruits, I needed a groom.  She told me that the
West is her face.  And I, the spirit of the West, am her
face.  She told me that my groom could be found in the
nation of the Northeast.  She told me that the
Northeast is where her womb lied.  The mountain
range of the Northeast is the sacred vagina of the
Mother Earth.  She told me that at the nation of the
Northeast, her Truth shall bear fruits.  From the nation
of the Northeast my Joyousness shall spring forth
fruits.  The spirit of the Northeast is my groom.  She
told me that his name is Kan."  Her voice sounded far
away,  yet it was clear and crisp like the sound of
pearls rolling on a golden platter.
      I lingered over her words momentarily and
hesitantly asked, "Where am I?"
      "You are within the circle of eight directions."
      "Why am I here?"  I inquired.
      "Because you are the spirit of the Northeast -
my groom.  You are the giver of life from my time of
death."  With a puzzled expression on my face I
squinted my eyes in order to see her more clearly.  She
kept on speaking.  "Autumn is joyous.  It is the time of
harvest.  It is the time when the fruits of the field are
brought home.  But autumn, notwithstanding its
joyousness, is also the time of judgment.  Autumn is
the beginning of death.  Thus autumn without its
harvest is without its joy - its purpose.  The spirit of
the West cannot be joyous without the fruits of the
spirit of the Northeast.  Kan is the nation of the
Northeast.  Kan is the mountain where lines are strong
above and yielding below.  It is the center of life and
worship.  Words bear fruits at Kan, the place of birth
beyond death.  It is where a new cycle is set in motion.
Kan is where a work that continues the past and passes
something on to the future is completed.  Thus time
becomes new and meaningful.  Time asserts the
moment in reality into the new opening in time.  Kan
is the womb of the Mother Earth.  It is where the Time
gives birth."
      I intently stared into the golden female shape
that stood before me.  I began to realize who she was,
gathering my courage I declared, "My dear young
bride, you know only half the story.  I am what you
say I am; but I am also of the place of the dogs.  Kan is
of the place of suffering and human agony.  Your
desire to partake in this is commendable; yet I wonder
whether you are truly prepared for the pain."
      "My young groom," she replied, "I have been
searching long for meaning in the midst of my wealth.
My beauty showcases the world over; but it is without
meaning, without purpose.  It is without direction.  I
long to erase this empty feeling in my heart."  Her tears
rolled into her smile.
      I looked down at my feet and reflected on her
answer.  Then I raised my eyes with a new
determination and stated,  "Dear Tae, autumn is near.
And there is much work to be done.  Abortion,
destruction and pollution abound everywhere.  Who
shall be harvested?  Those who know the season.  I
shall bring forth the fruit of Truth.  I shall renew the
time of death into time of birth."
      With a tremble she spoke.  "My dear young
groom, at your presence my heart thumps wildly with
joy."  Her radiant hair glowed and her pale smile with
the trail of death lingered in her space long after she
faded away into the moonlit glow of the swirl.
      A moment later the seawater tumbled into the
whirlpool and I began to float upward.  The whirlpool
disappeared.  I now found myself floating on the
surface of the ocean.  I swam to the direction of the
snake-dragon islands.  The moon was still in the ocean.
The stars still fell all around me into the surrounding
water.  I swam into the moonlit ocean and climbed the
island of the dragon's tail.  Turning to the sea I looked
far and long over the night vista.  In the West, I spotted
a golden fish jumping into the starry night horizon.
      Chapter 2   'Chusuk' Feast.


      It was the morning of the 'Chusuk'.  The
morning sun was creeping over the window sill.  The
air outside of my blanket was a little chilly.  I did not
feel like venturing outside of my warm and
comfortable mattress.
      "Kan, time to get up!" I heard my mother's
anxious yet tender calling.  Then I realized I was not
lying in my own room.  I had slept in my
grandmother's house last night.  My mother called me
again. "Kan, it is the morning of the 'Chusuk.'  Hurry
up.  Come and greet your elders."  Then it hit me as to
why I was already up so early this morning.  The smell
of delicious food and the sounds of loud laughter and
constant chattering filled the house.
      To me the 'Chusuk' was the most eagerly
awaited time of the year.  Come September, when the
fall harvests of rice and fruits had just begun though
the autumn leaves were not yet to be found, our family
gathered to our grandmother's house in order to
celebrate the harvests and to thank our ancestors, the
local deities and the holy tri-spirit.  The very first
harvests of the year were reserved for the spirits;  we
made the point of staging a feast for them.
      Suddenly the door to the room burst open; "Hey,
cousin!"  A pack of youngsters barged into the room,
stumbling and stepping all over me.
      "Hey, Hey!  Be careful.  Give me a minute to get
dressed."  A younger cousin of mine started to drag me
out of the mattress by pulling my legs while other ones
were rolling me over by wrapping the blanket all
around me.  In an instant I turned into a living
mummy.  Watching my startled expression on my face,
they all jumped up and down in laughter.  I started to
laugh out loud with them when our grandmother
entered the room.  After scolding us for making so
much noise, she chased away all the young ones.  She
told me to get ready quickly and left the room closing
the door after her.  I quickly got up and dressed.
Outside the window the blue September sky held itself
high above.
      When I got to the living room, all of my elders
were already gathered there.  The room was
overflowing with new stories that needed to be told.  I
bowed once to greet all the elders in the room.  My
father greeted me first.  "Kan, you are late this
morning."
      My uncle remarked in a tone of amazement,
"You have grown into a young man since the last time I
saw you, Kan.  How old are you now, Kan?"
      "I am sixteen now, uncle," I answered feeling
proud like a man.
      Another uncle said, "He is a man now, isn't he?"
While looking around the room he announced to my
father,  "All right.  Tonight he is going to have his first
taste of rice wine."
      My mother and an aunt brought in a table and
set it up against the northern wall of the room.  Other
aunts brought in food and my uncles placed them on
the table.  Soon a table with the most delicious food
stood before us.
      With a solemn face the eldest uncle hung the
paper signifying the holy tri-spirit on the middle of
the northern wall above the table.  To the paper's left
my uncle placed the picture of our deceased
grandfather and the names of our ancestors.  To its
right, he pasted the names of the local deities.  I had
never seen my grandfather in person.  He had died
before I was born.  But from the picture I could tell
that he was a stern and determined man.
      It was difficult to sit still and simply stare at
all the food in front of us, but no one was allowed to
eat until we properly offered the many foods to our
spirits.  Thus even we children participated eagerly in
this ritual, determined to carry it out to the end.
      A large bowl containing sand was placed at the
front of the table.  Our eldest uncle stuck several sticks
of incense into the bowl.  Kneeling in front of the
table, he lighted the incense as a jug of rice-wine was
brought in.  The familiar smell of burning ritual scents
cleansed the air.  My father kneeled next to him and
poured the rice-wine into the small bowl which the
eldest uncle held above the smoke of the scents.  He
circled the bowl of rice-wine above the scent sticks
three times, signifying the presence of the holy tri-
spirit, and placed the bowl with the rice-wine on the
table.  Opening the cover of the rice bowl on the table,
our eldest uncle methodically scooped up some rice
with a spoon.  He put the rice into the soup bowl next
to the rice bowl.  Then he placed the spoon in an
upright position into the rice.  He struck the bottom of
an empty bowl on the table three times with a pair of
chopsticks, inviting the holy tri-spirit to drink the rice-
wine and feast on the foods.  He stood up.  "Bow," he
commanded in a solemn tone.  By now our entire
family was standing behind him; we all bowed twice,
following the lead of the eldest uncle.
      The place was simply too small to accommodate
all of us.  Every time we bowed, I ended up fighting
for space with my cousins by bumping them with my
head or by poking them with my elbows.  Sometimes
one of us would fall sideways, causing a helpless
domino effect, knocking over all us children.
      Next the eldest uncle offered the rice wine to
our great-great-great-grand parents by turning the
wine cup three times over the scent sticks and then
placing it on the table.  We were supposed to offer
wine and foods up to four generations above ours.  He
cut off a small piece of meat from the meat dish and
the fish dish.  With the cue of the familiar sound of
the chopsticks striking the empty bowl three times, the
solemn command, "Bow," echoed in the room.  we all
bowed to our ancestor twice.  We did the same for our
other ancestors up to our grandfather.
      By now my elbows and knees were aching, the
ceiling started spinning around and the floor
continually bumped into my forehead.  After what
seemed like an endless dipping of heads, we heard the
call to turn around.  We all turned around, facing the
wall opposite the table.  During this time the spirits ate
their offerings; we were to give them privacy by
turning around.  I thought the ritual was over by now.
"Soon we'll have our turn at all that delicious food," I
thought.  I was thrilled.  However, I had forgotten that
we had not offered wine and foods to the local deities.
Our eldest uncle asked us to turn around again to face
the ritual table.  New foods were brought in, and our
ritual resumed for the local deities.  I was back to
knocking my head.  The ritual started at nine in the
morning and it ended around noon.  It was finally time
to eat: the moment I had been waiting for.  This food
we offered to the spirits were the most delicious in the
world.  It was well worth the wait.

      The day's ritual was not yet over, though.  The
afternoon was reserved for visiting our grandfather's
grave.  Packing rest of the food, we got on a bus
especially rented for this occasion.  We were a big
family and if we were to move in a group, we needed a
bus.  I had at least twenty-five cousins.  I could never
remember the exact number because at every family
gathering, there were always some more newly born
cousins of mine.
      The bus was loud.  The elders were drinking
rice-wine while we children sang in turn.  After about
an hour, our pilgrimage to our grandfather's grave
brought us to the bottom of a mountain.  The grave
was located up on a mountain overlooking the city in
the North where he was born.   He had to leave the city
during the Korean war, as the city became part of the
communist North Korea.  He was not allowed go back
again.  He longed one day to return to his birth place.
Just before he died, he asked to be buried on this
mountain overlooking the city where he was born.
      Each one of us, holding a bowl or plate of ritual
food, climbed the mountain for about a half an hour
until we reached the grave.  The same ritual was
performed at this site, although this time it was only to
our grandfather.

      We had a hearty dinner at our grandmother's
house.  That night I had my first taste of the rice wine.
My uncles kept giving me the wine and I drank it
without hesitation.  It tasted like thick rice water.  It
tingled my tongue.  My stomach felt warm and my face
became hot and red.  My father and my uncles kept on
drinking and talking the whole night.  My
grandmother, mother and aunts were gathered around
in the kitchen, preparing and packaging rest of the
food to be distributed around the neighborhood.
      All the other children were asleep.  I sat alone
on the front porch thumping my full belly.  My whole
body felt electrified from the drinking.  The clear
autumn sky shone brilliantly with the streams of the
stars.
      The chirping sound of the crickets entertained
me.  My grandmother's old dog, lying next to me,
suddenly got up and walked to the front gate, wagging
its tale.  The gate opened, and my grandfather, wearing
a white suit, walked in.  I had never seen him in person
- I had only seen his picture - but I was sure it was
him.  I even saw his picture this morning during the
ritual.  Pleasantly surprised, I ran up to him.  He was a
tall and a handsome man.  He wore a white suit with a
white tie, white shoes and a white hat, glowing in the
darkness of the night.  Looking carefully into my face,
he smiled.  His eyes were soft and peaceful.  He
stroked my head without saying anything.  I spoke
first.  "Grandfather, please come in.  Everyone is
waiting for you inside."
      "Ha, ha, ha!" He laughed loudly which
momentarily startled me.  He held his large hand out
and firmly grabbed my right hand.
      "Grandfather please come in.  Everyone is here
today.  I want you to see my little sisters." I was about
to go in holding his hand when I noticed him softly
shaking his head.  Instead, holding my hand, he took
me outside.  When I walked out the front gate the place
looked strange.  It was not the neighborhood of my
grandmother's house.
      Parked in front of the gate was a large white
car.  Entering the driver's side, my grandfather
beckoned me to get in.  I hopped into the passenger
side.  "Grandfather, this is a very nice car," I said
excitedly.  "Can I drive it sometime?"
      He laughed, turning the ignition key.
"Grandchild, do you know how to drive?" He spoke in a
voice that sounded like a huge bell ringing.  Actually I
did not know how to drive nor had I ever had the
desire to drive.  But when I saw my grandfather
shifting his weight into the driver's seat, the urge to
try driving suddenly came over me.  "Well, no," I
responded.
      "I came to your grandmother's house today
because it is the `Chusuk'.  I enjoyed the family
gathering today, Kan.  And the food was delicious.
Did you enjoy your grandmother's food?" he asked me
with a warm smile.
      "Very much, Sir," I answered, remembering I
had some nuts in my pocket.  "Grandfather, would you
like some nuts?" I asked.  He again laughed and told me
he was full.
      " `Chusuk' is the favorite time of the year for
me, grandchild.  I get to see you and all the members of
the family."
      "Did you actually get to eat all the food we
offered to you today? I wanted to see if you were
enjoying the food, but my uncle asked all of us to turn
around while you ate."  I said.
      "Yes, of course I enjoyed the meal.  I think the
harvest this year was exceptionally tasty."  He drove
for what seemed like a very short time.  Arriving at a
traditional Korean style house, appearing oddly
familiar, he told me we were at our destination: his
house.  The house was not large.  When he entered the
front gate, a child of about six years of age charged at
me, waving his arms and yelling, "Hello, cousin!"
      Looking at my perplexed face, my grandfather
explained, "He is your older cousin who died even
before you were born."
      I said in a confused tone, "Then he must be
older than I.   Howcome he's so small?"
      "In a spiritual world, the body and mind simply
do not grow and mature at the same rate as your
earthly world.  It takes much longer.  At least the same
time span as the earthly time span of three generations
is needed for him to properly grow and mature in this
spiritual world."
      "Cousin, c'mere." Grabbing my hand, the boy led
me to a corner of the yard.  There he showed me his
collection of toys.  Suddenly pulling down his pants, he
started to urinate on my shoes.
      "Hee, hee, hee." He laughed sheepishly.
Completely shocked, I stared into his face.  I could tell
from his harmless, friendly expression that it was his
way of saying that he was glad to see me.
      The smell of urine wafted strongly into my
nostrils.  I thought to myself that the smell of urine in
the spiritual world was about ten times nastier that the
smell of urine in our world.
      My grandfather approached us slowly.  From
his bag he pulled out the food which my grandmother
packed in the kitchen to be distributed.  Jumping with
joy, my cousin snatched the food from my
grandfather's hand and ran into the house.
      My feet were wet and I was smelly.  I took off
my shoes and socks and washed my feet in the front
yard.  Then I followed my grandfather into the house.
Contrary to the look of the exterior, the interior of the
house was quite modern.  I could not even recognize
the use of some of the machines and appliances,
identifiable as machines only by their electrical
switches.  I followed him into his study room.
      The room was simple.  Only a small desk and
two floor cushions furnished the room, although
bookshelves filled with books lined the walls.  The
room was a traditional Korean room, the stone floor
functioning as a large heating unit.  The floor was
covered with waxed paper and it shined elegantly,
giving the feeling of an ancient oak tree.
      Sitting cross-legged on the floor cushion with
his back straight, he motioned me to sit.  I sat in a
kneeling position.
      "Kan, I have brought you here today because I
wanted to show you the ways of the spiritual world."
Lighting a pipe, he started to speak and I fell deeply
into the rhythm of his words.  "This spiritual world is
actually composed of nine levels.  When people die,
they go to their appropriate levels depending on their
spiritual strength.  The first level heaven is where the
criminals go; the highest attained spirits go to the
ninth level heaven.  For every human being on earth,
there is a spirit residing in that body.  When the
connection between the spirit and the flesh is broken
due to the dysfunction of the body, the person dies and
the spirit enters the spiritual world.  However,
depending on the strength of the individual's spirit,
the spirit enters the appropriate level of the spiritual
world.  If the person in his search for the meaning of
life attained for himself a higher self, then the person
shall enter a higher spiritual world."
      "Grandfather, what do you mean by a higher
self, and how would you attain a higher self?"
      "A strong-willed individual is a high spiritual
individual.  An individual who sacrifices oneself for
the good of the others is a high spiritual individual.
The earthly environment has the special quality of
testing one's spirituality.  The earthly world is unique
in the sense that one can not only mature and grow in
the physical sense but also in the spiritual sense as
well.  In this spiritual world, it is extremely difficult
for a spirit to attain a higher spiritual self.  That is
why there are so many spirits who desire to abandon
their role as ancestor spirits in heaven and to be born
again as human children so they can try once more in
attaining higher spirituality.  Great spirits like Christ
or Buddha reside in the sixth level of the spiritual
heaven.  Good and decent individuals reside in the
fifth level of the spiritual heaven.  The holy tri-spirit
resides in the ninth level of the spiritual heaven as the
ruler of all spiritual matters in this universe, including
those spirits on earth.  However, soon the Tenth
Heaven shall open up on earth and the earth shall be
the highest heaven.  Then the holy tri-spirit shall
descend to earth in its spiritual form to reside on earth.
For this purpose the spiritual world is preparing busily
- even today."
      "Grandfather, I have always been curious about
the holy tri-spirit.  Is this holy tri-spirit an individual
spirit or are there three different spirits? Is this holy
spirit also a human spirit or is it just a logic system or
a rule?  And if this spirit is a human spirit, has he ever
been born on earth?  Does he have a name?"
      He looked into me tenderly.  "Kan, you ask very
pertinent questions.  First of all, the holy tri-spirit is
the ruling king of all spirits.  He is the Lord God.
Thus of course he is a human spirit.  Second, although
he is one individual spirit, the manifestation of his
works show three different faces in reality; thus he is
a tri-spirit.  Thirdly, yes, he was born on earth as a
human being.  He went down to earth as a human child
when the earthly world was at its worst crisis.  He
went down to earth as a human child because the
highest spiritual Heaven is about to be opened on
earth.  This spiritual world loses its meaning and its
joy if on earth there were no humans.  Without humans
on earth, the sun and the moon shall still exist, but
they shall have no meaning nor any purpose.  Thus at
its worst crisis the Lord himself went down to earth to
be born as a human child.  I cannot reveal to you his
name at this point.  Who he was, Kan, you shall have to
find out for yourself.  I can only say that the mother
earth screams with the pain of bearing the child of the
new age, the new time, the new Heaven on Earth.  Kan,
however your life turns out, never forget what I have
told you tonight.  There shall be many temptations in
the future, but never forget the fact that this old man
is your ancestor.  If our descendants abandon their
ancestors, our descendants can never enter the coming
new time of the highest spiritual Heaven on Earth
because they have abandoned their roots.  If our
descendants do not survive into the new age, we
ancestor spirits perish as well.  Thus we must depend
on our living descendants on earth to be right and just.
Without roots, there can never be fruit.  And if a root
cannot bear fruit, it cannot have a meaning.  It shall
only decay and perish.  When the Tenth Heaven opens
up on earth I shall ascend to earth as a living spirit
and I shall be able to meet all my descendants."

      I remembered thanking him for his enlightening
words.  And I promised him that I should never betray
my ancestors.  I bode him farewell by bowing twice.
However, I could not remember exactly what happened
after that.  I found myself waking up at my
grandmother's house the next morning with a terrible
hangover.  My head ached and my stomach rumbled.
      Faintly I heard my mother yelling at my uncles
from the front step of the house.  "You men gave my
child too much to drink last night!  Look - he even
urinated on his shoes.  Just think: a sixteen year-old
boy urinating on his own shoes.  He must had been
really drunk.  You men should be ashamed of
yourselves giving rice-wine to a child.  God, and the
smell of this urine is out of this earthly world, I say.  It
will take at least a month for this smell to disappear."
      I remembered my small older cousin.  "I must
ask my mother about him," I thought.Chapter 3   American Embassy.


      The morning sun was yet to be seen.  Only the
dim red glow over the tall watchtower of the U.S.
embassy lit the sky.  Yet there was already a long line
aside the high brick wall of the embassy.  My parents
and I were roughly in the middle.  Shaking his whole
body, the man in front of us screamed, "Oh, it's
c-c-cold!" in between cigarette puffs.  Over the
northern horizon the protective mountain of this city
of Seoul stood, still capped with snow.  Reflecting the
eastern sunlight, the mountaintop radiated bright
whiteness.  It snowed a considerable amount during
this winter which meant we could expect a good crop
the coming year.
      It was almost spring.  The sound of singing
birds and flowing streams was calling forth the early
blossom.  But this morning it was unexpectedly cold.
"The wind, the eldest daughter of the sky, is jealous of
the beauty of the blossom, the youngest daughter of
the sky.  That is why it is so cold this morning," my
father explained.  Clink, clink, clink - the soldiers
wearing heavy boots marched up and down the paved
road guarding the embassy.  Their cheeks were red
from the cold and every breath let out steam visible in
the air.
      I had just graduated from junior high school
two weeks before.  If the early spring and the early
morning brought about the beginning and the end of
time, my graduation marked the beginning and the end
of space.  After the graduation I was charged with a
renewed tension.  My mind was set in a new cycle of
emotion.  The adulthood of high school was awaiting
me.  However, within a week I had to dream a
different dream.  My sweet expectations regarding
high school crumbled.  I was thrown into a situation of
utter unknown and perhaps a situation of greater
expectations.  Our family was going to immigrate to
the United States.
      I was going to ride one of those mysterious
cloud walkers that flew in the air.  I had seen them on
TV.  It had extended wings that did not fold on the
side.  Pumping air out using propulsion, it would run
down a stretch of paved road, then raising its head it
would soar into the clouds.  My grandmother once told
me that in the old days if our great grandfathers
wanted to travel a long distance, they had to use magic.
Using intense mind concentration, they would fold
over the earth that lied in between, thus shortening the
actual distance.  But such a method was no fun at all.
The method simply used up too much energy and no
sight-seeing was possible.  These days if we took buses
or trains, we could relax and enjoy the view.  I
definitely preferred these new Western methods of
travel.  The thought of leisurely riding on a machine
flying high above in the air while watching over the
vast span of the earth unfold underneath energized me.

      Smoking his third cigarette on a row, the man
standing in front of me wearing a thick winter parka
asked another man, "So, what are you doing here so
early this morning?"
      "I'm trying to get a visa to go to the United
States for a business deal.  What about you?" the other
man asked.
      "I am trying to immigrate to America.  This is
the fourth time I am coming here.  Every time I come,
they reject me.  But I tell them: listen, I love your
country.  I love democracy.  I love America, the land of
opportunity.  I tell them I hate dictatorship.  I tell them
I desire to be an American.  I tell them that I dream
the American dream.  Now, what do you think: don't I
look like an American to you?"  He posed like a
cowboy riding on a horse and yelled, "Yee-haw!
Yee-haw!"

      It was almost high noon when we entered inside
the brick wall of the embassy.  By now my stomach was
angrily mumbling its daily request of food intake.
Inside the wall there was a small courtyard.  Beyond
the courtyard there was a two story concrete building
to the left.  We entered the building by walking up the
outdside steel steps leading upstairs.  Upon entering
the building I saw rows of long wooden chairs fully
occupied by people.  The place had the same kind of
stuffy uneasiness as a hospital waiting room.  We
registered at the front desk.  We were given a number
tag and an instruction to sit and wait till our number
was called.
      As we sat in the long wooden chairs, I looked
around the people seated around me.  Some were
nervously glancing at the other people waiting.  The
young ones, tugging their parents' tattered coats, asked
questions like "Are we really going to America?" or
"Why are we leaving?" or "Are there kids to play with
in America?"  Some people, grimacing, tightly grasped
bags of belongings, holding them as if the bags
contained all they owned.  The sound of babies crying
innocently contrasted with the sight of other people
simply sitting motionless, staring directly in front of
them with their heads slightly bowed, bottling up all
emotion.
      Finally our number was announced over the
loudspeaker by late afternoon.  After handing over the
little number tag inscribed with the number one-eleven
to the window clerk, we entered the door adjacent to
the window.  A gentleman with a large belly greeted
us.  He and my father shook their hands.  "Hi, my name
is David McCatty.  I am your interviewer.  Please
follow me in," he said in a matter of fact way and we
followed him into his office.  The room had a large
U.S. flag standing next to a huge desk made with a
pleasant-smelling wood.  The interviewer sat on a chair
that was almost as tall as I.  When he sat down, the
back of the chair bent backwards.  I was startled
because I thought he was going to fall backwards.  And
then, mysteriously, the chair pushed his heavy body
forward.  As if nothing had happened, the interviewer
sat there smiling back at us.  I thought this Westerner
was definitely strange.  My parents and I sat down
facing him.
      The interviewer held a black book with the
word "Bible" written on it with his right hand, and
holding his left hand up with his palm facing us, he
asked us to repeat after him.  I was not sure what he
said, but I repeated after him along with my parents,
trying as best I could to phonetically mimic what he
said.

      The black book reminded me of another cold
winter day.  Near our house lived a man who was
possessed by the Jesus ghost.  He walked around the
neighborhood holding the same black book, yelling,
"Lord Jesus, Lord Jesus.  I have faith in you, Lord
Jesus."  It was when I was about six.  He told me that it
was Christmas and if I would follow him to this Jesus
worship house, I would get a lot of candies.  Thus I
followed him to the Jesus worship house.  The place
was dark and creepy.  Facing the entrance, at the
center of the wall, there was a statue of a man nailed
to the wall.  His hands and feet were bleeding.  The
place was spooky.  The place looked haunted.
Everyone in the place took a bow to that statue.  A
man wearing a funny-looking small white hat and a
strange-looking long dress entered.  It was a cold day
and I was shivering.  The man with the funny-looking
hat talked for what seemed like an endless span of
time.  I waited patiently, expecting candies at the end
of that long and boring talk.  But he never got around
to finishing his story and I did not remember whether
I actually had gotten candies that day or not.

      The color of the interviewer's hair was actually
yellow and the color of his eyes were blue.  I had seen
westerners before on TV, but our TV set was black and
white; I had never seen anyone before with yellow
hair.  I wondered whether it was his real hair.  He
asked some questions to my parents which I did not
understand.  I took English courses for three years in
junior high school, but here I could not even
comprehend simple questions.  Then he asked me
questions.  I guessed that his first question was
whether I understood English, to which I answered
"Yes".  The next two questions I did not understand,
mostly because his strange features occupied my
attention.  Nevertheless, I answered yes to both
questions.  Then all of a sudden his pale blue eyes
widened and his yellow eyebrows traveled upward to
middle of his forehead.  His eyebrows were also yellow.
"Really?" he asked me quizzically.  Immediately I
barked, "No, no, I meant no."  Without turning my head
I peeked at my parents' faces.  They were angrily
glaring at me.  From then on I let my father speak for
me.  I used the time to study the interviewer called
David more intensely.  While he spoke he used a lot of
hand gestures.  And even his hands had yellow hairs.
At every few words his tongue would stick out of his
mouth in between his teeth.  It looked like a snake
playing around.  The room was hot and he was
sweating faintly.  He had a strong yellowish smell like
the dog meat stew which my mother cooked for me
every summer.  The dog meat stew was definitely my
favorite dish.  She would cook the dog meat stew on a
hot summer day or when I was sick.  I could never
figure out why or how but while eating the dog stew,
the sweat would come forth like rain from me and
whatever sickness I had would be gone by the next
morning.  Finally the interview was over and our
immigration to the U.S. was approved.  He stamped our
passports.

      Coming home in a taxi, I was excited.  I was
excited to be flying over the wide open Pacific ocean.
The big-arrow people of the American Indians peaked
my interest.  The material glitter of America intrigued
my expectations.  However, at the same time, the
feeling of lost emptiness started to creep into my
stomach.  The sneak suspicion as to "Who am I?"
interrogated my subconscious mind.  "What does it
mean to immigrate to a different country?" I asked
myself.  I was born and raised in Korea.  In my veins
the blood of the five-thousand year-old history of my
ancestral heritage was thumping away strongly.  My
allegiance and loyalty belonged to my fatherland.  Yet
what about the land I was about to make my new
home?  Did I not have an obligation to this new land as
well?  Then how could I serve two nations?  How was I
going to solve such a conflict?  To a sixteen year-old
boy this was a serious question.  "How can a wife have
two husbands?  How can a man have two sets of
ancestors?  How can a boy have two nations?"  Was I
betraying my country?  What was my country?  Who
was I?  As if interrogating a spy I questioned myself.
"Who are you?  What is your name?  Where are you
from?  To whom have you pledged your loyalty.  Who
are you working for?  Why are you here?  Why are you
immigrating to the U.S.?  What do you want?  Are you
not a spy in the U.S.?  Are you not a spy in Korea?"
Suddenly I imagined that I was being kicked by the
interrogator and I kicked my foot forward.
Accidentally, I kicked my mother's foot who was
sitting next to me.
      With a confused yet concerned face she looked
at me and asked me, "What is wrong, Kan?"
      "Another question!" I thought.  Yet her question
made me sad because I truly did not know what was
wrong or whether I really was a spy.  It was just that
something felt wrong.  And the feeling sank to the
bottom of my stomach.

      Chapter 4   Brooklyn.


      We had to change the plane twice, once in
Anchorage, where we officially entered the United
States, and the next time in Chicago.  From Chicago to
New York swirls of turbulence buffeted the plane.
The whole structure of the plane shook wildly.  The
creaking noise from the wings growled and whined,
sounding like what I had imagined the ancient
dinosaurs would have sounded like.  My younger sisters
threw up, resulting from the combination of twenty
hours of airplane food and this turbulence.  The
hysterical airline stewardesses arranged for us to sit at
different seats so they could clean up the mess in the
meantime.  One of the stewardesses brought us about
ten white bags and gestured to my sisters to throw up
in the bags.  My sisters nodded their heads.
      The sight of New York city at night from the
air was glaring.  The tall beam of lights were flooding
the night air.  I and my smelly sisters stuck to the plane
window to marvel at the island of tall lights.  The
place flaunted its wealth.  Brighter than the stars in
the sky, the organized layer of lights audaciously
challenged the laws of nature.  The concrete result of
human hunger for material wealth was gathered at one
place to showcase the limitless potential of human
might.  Rounding the head of a copper lady holding a
torch at the southern tip of this massive island, the
plane slowly prepared for a landing.  Wearing a dress
that flew with the Atlantic wind, the copper lady stood
firmly, symbolizing the Western ethic of liberty and
justice.  This lone virtuous lady stood patiently, bottled
up with her secret love, waiting until the day her true
lover came ashore.
      At the airport my father's friend was waiting
for us.  He brought a car that was even larger than my
room used to be.  At the touch of a button the car
window opened and closed.  All the way to our
destination I kept opening and closing the window.  We
were brought to an apartment at a place called
Brooklyn.

      Next morning I found out that there was a
beach in front of our apartment building.  So I went
out to the beach.  But to my surprise, it was filled with
foreigners.  Then I realized that I was not in Korea.  I
was in Brooklyn.  They were indeed strange looking
people.  I went around studying them.  They had skin
that was pale and a lot of people had red burns.  Some
people had strange brown dots all over their bodies.
They also had unusual customs.  Everyone was lying on
a long chair instead of lying on the sand.  Most of the
women had bathing suits that stuck tightly to their
body and I could see their nipples.  Actually if I had
went close enough to them and stuck my head onto
their necks and looked down, I could have probably
seen their breasts.  I was about to try it when
something else caught my attention.  "Everyone is lying
on a long chair instead of lying on the sand!"  Then I
realized the reason that I was disturbed.  The beach
was filthy.  The sand was gray.  There was trash all
over the place.  I could smell oil in the salty air.  "No
wonder people are lying on the chair," I thought to
myself.  The vast expanse of ocean that forgives all
human debris stretched into the horizon; yet on this
beach as if time has stopped the natural progression of
ocean, human filth withstood the endless motion of the
waves.  Nature has lost its battle against human
consumption on this beach at a place called Brooklyn.
I felt a sudden chill of loneliness.

      In the afternoon we went into Manhattan for a
tour.  The place overwhelmed me.  Simply looking at so
many high buildings made me dizzy.  But at the same
time I could not understand why the streets were so
dirty.  In the midst of wealth, oddly enough at every
block there were people begging for money.  Some
women walked around almost naked.  The white people
were interesting; but the black people in the city truly
stole my curiosity.  "How could anyone have skin that
was actually black?" I thought.  I walked up to a black
person who was selling some kind of a toy on the street
and looked at his skin carefully.  His black skin looked
natural to him.  But there was something empty about
him.  He seemed to be asking a question that could not
be answered.  So I asked him a question in my broken
English.  "Why is your skin black?"  He looked at me
for a minute in complete shock, and then he started to
yell into my face.  "You crazy, mother-fucking, yellow
bastard . . . ."  His mouth became larger than his face
and for a moment I thought he was going to eat me.  I
ran off as fast as I could.  I thought he was going to
cry.

      Later that day we went to a place called the
"Supermarket".  The place was bigger than my Junior
High School.  Food was everywhere.  People went
around filling their carts with food wrapped in fancy
packages.  There was even a section that was filled
with food for dogs and cats.  This country was
wealthier than I had ever dreamed!.  But coming back
to our apartment we passed a section of the city which
looked as if it had been bombed.  The place looked
exactly like the picture that I had seen of Korea right
after the Korean War.  This place did not make sense
to me.  The America that I had seen so far did not
make much sense to me.  It was a big puzzle.


      Chapter 5   High School.


      Autumn came and I began going to high school.
It was only about thirty minute walk from our
apartment.  The school itself was a large complex; it
took me almost a month before I finally figured out
how to get around inside.  It was especially confusing
to me because I had to go to different places for
different classes.
      The students at school looked as if they were
from third world countries.  They wore torn off pants
and leather jackets.  At the same time, girls walked
around while chewing gum and putting on their
lipsticks.  Their faces were colored red and blue all
over.  What especially caught my attention was the fact
that there were so many students who went around
with wires on their teeth.  For the longest time I
thought it was because their teeth had fallen off.  I
reasoned that since America was a rich country, there
must be many sweet candies for them to eat, and  from
eating too many candies their teeth had fallen off and
those wires were holding them in place until proper
treatment.

      I met another Korean at School in my English
as a Second Language Class.  One day we went fishing
together, but we didn't fish much.  Instead, I found it
more interesting to hear stories about Korean
Americans' lives in New York.  "It's hard, physically
hard," he kept saying.  I sensed his longing for Korea
and his childhood.  "My father has to get up at three
o'clock in the morning everyday to go to the market to
purchase daily fruits and vegetables to sell at his
grocery store.  Once he injured his back while lifting a
heavy box and had to be hospitalized for a month.
Everyday half of the fruits and vegetables spoil and
have to be thrown out.  It's hard labor."
       "Sometimes a woman would come in and try to
steel a mellon by putting it underneath her clothes and
pretend she was pregnant.  Can you imagine that?
Once a robber came into our store with a gun while
only my mother happened to be in the store.  Even now
she has nightmares about the incident.  You know, this
is a threatening place, a place where everyone is an
enemy.  We are now even forced to fight among
ourselves."
      He told me of an occurrence a couple of months
ago when another Korean had started a similar
operation just next block and they had a price war for
a while.  "We both immigrated from Korea to America
to find opportunity, and now we find ourselves as
adversaries.  Who would have ever guessed?"
      "The United States overflows with material
wealth, but an awful lot of suffering is going on for
just a piece of this wealth which one may not even get.
In this process, I think my spiritually is one of the
most prominent casualties.  You know, it is a long
process of torture physically and spiritually.  When I
first set foot on a bus in New York, I did not know
that I needed an exact change, so I gave the driver a
dollar bill and requested a change in my broken
English.  Then that dumb driver's eyes bulged like
balls of fire and he yelled at me, you know.  'You
dumb foreigner!  Can't you read English?  What does it
say on the coin box?'  He didn't give me time to
answer. 'It says exact change. What do I look like, a
cashier?  There are people on this bus that have places
to go.  Get out!  Go back to China!  You Idiot.'  I
walked down the bus steps onto the street with tears in
my eyes."
      I felt confused and did not know what to tell
my friend.  He simply looked up at the white speck of
clouds in the sky; then after looking at me sideways he
spoke in a smaller voice.  "When I first came to
America about three years ago, I was enrolled at a
junior high school about twenty minutes away from
our current high school.  In the beginning the school
looked so foreign and strange to me.  It seemed
everyone in school was taller than me.  And there
wasn't anyone that I could relate to at school.
Whenever I asked for help other students would laugh
at me.  One day while I was coming home, about five
students from my school grabbed me by the shoulder
from the behind.  At first I was glad and grateful that
they even noticed me.  I was about to greet them when
one of them held me by the neck and shoved me
against the fence wall.  They started calling me
'drycleaner chink'.  'Drycleaner Chink, Drycleaner
chink!'  That's what they said.  I still remember their
tone.  You know, my parents do not even own a dry
cleaner."  I noticed him rubbing his eyes.  "They told
me to give them money or they would beat me.  And
one of them pounded the fence behind my back.  They
searched my pockets and took my money.  I was so
scared I pissed in my pants."  With a nervous chuckle
he continued.  "And you know those idiots told me if I
ever told about this to anybody they would have me
deported back to China.  I paid them money for over a
year after that."  Tears slowly rolled down his cheeks.
Yet he still tried to smile.
      "I find it difficult to find human warmth
anywhere."  He spoke with a trembling passion.  "I
think I have forgotten how to truly trust and care for
other people.  I wonder, you know: does this country
have any meaning for you?  My parents simply live for
the pleasure of counting money at night.  Money!
Money!  That's it.  It has become their whole lives'
purpose and pleasure.  We go to church every Sunday
but I cannot find any peace and warmth there.  It
simply is not a place that I can call my home.  At every
sermon the preacher makes sure you understand what
he wants from you is money.  He condemns paying
proper respect to our deceased ancestors while he
worships Abraham, the ancestor of the Jewish people.
He has no respect for our Fatherland, Korea, while he
sanctifies Israel.  It doesn't make sense to me.  It is
simply one more tiresome show.  I hate my parents for
bringing me to this awful country.  I want to go back.
I miss Korea.  I don't know what I want to do here.  I
have no future here.  I often wonder why my parents
had come to this country."

      I tried to be positive on my current outlook,
after all, my friend seemed to deal with all the
problems and frustrations of life in America well
dispite his past misfortunes.  Was it that he had become
too cynical to take anything seriously?  I told my
friend that I did not know much about America yet to
agree or disagree with him.  But so far, from what I
had seen of America, I told him I liked it.  "Don't you
find the human scientific achievement that have built
this great city admiring.  Does it not challenge you
intellectually?"  I optimistically asked.  "Doesn't it
motivate you to find out more about how this place
functions?"  He just laughed and told me that I had not
come to grips with reality yet.  With a large grin on his
face he told me that the fish that I had just caught was
not supposed to be eaten.


Chapter 6   Mrs. Robinson.


      It was a Memorial Day.  Our English as second
language teacher, Mrs. Robinson, told us this morning
there was no English class because she had to go
somewhere; but she told us we were welcome to
accompany her.  A couple of classmates and I went
with her to a church next to the high school.  On the
walk, she told us that her husband died during the
Korean war.  He was a doctor with integrity.  He
insisted on wearing surgical gloves during surgery.  But
his insistence on proper surgery procedure annoyed his
superiors.  Her husband did not get along with the
superiors and they decided he should get a taste of the
real fighting situation.  They decided to send him to a
hospital nearer to the front line.  "He died working
there. . . . that stupid man," she murmured to herself.
      There was a band at the church cemetery.  They
were playing a loud music that did not seem to fit the
situation.  In step with the rhythm of the band, a unit
of girl scouts accompanied the ceremony.  Among the
row of girl scouts Mrs. Robinson pointed out a girl to
me.  "She is my daughter," she whispered.  Her
daughter, in the unit, proudly wore the traditional
brown uniform with yellow trim and a yellow sash as
she solemnly marched into the cemetery with her
fellow girl scouts.  She placed flowers at her father's
grave.  "Stupid man," she murmured to herself again.
Watching her daughter placing the flowers, tears rolled
down Mrs. Robinson's cheeks.

      In tears, I ran from the cemetery.  I could not
watch further.  "Why?"  I asked myself.  I felt I was the
one who was  responsible for her husband's death.
"Why did our grandparents fight among ourselves, with
what purpose, for what reason?"  I felt I was the guilty
one.  I was guilty for having involved other nations in
my own fight.  I was the guilty one in front of history.
For a minute I did not want this blood in my hand.  I
wished I wasn't the guilty one.  I cursed my ancestors
for the responsibility on my shoulder.  For a brief
moment I cursed my ancestors for the responsibility on
my shoulder.
      Chapter 7   Dear John.


      Upon graduation I entered an American
University.  With its ornate stone and brick buildings
and neatly trimmed grass fields, the campus welcomed
me with its beauty.  It was the first time I actually
came shoulder to shoulder with mainstream Americans.
The students, individualistic and brimming with
energy, were constantly full of ideas on how to
maximize their fun, but at the same time they were
also determined to complete all of their academic
work.  These young Americans seemed to want it all.
      The students had parents who were doctors,
engineers, congressmen, presidents or principals.  My
roommate's father was a professor.  One day he asked
me, "Hey, Kan, what do your parents do?"  At that
brief moment an odd feeling overwhelmed me inside;
strangely I felt ashamed to answer.  I  made up stories.

      I befriended a person named John.  He was
always full of energy and constantly talked of
philosophy, politics and history.  Most of the things he
said I barely understood: "Kant, Marx, Heidegger, Art,
Film. . . ."  On campus, it seemed everyone knew him -
they'd all wave to him or stop him for a minute as we
walked between classes.  My fellow hallmates would
gather around his room and would talk all night long
about things that I more often did not understand.  He
would always say what seemed to be the right thing to
say, but I didn't know why it was so 'right.'  He would
tell jokes I didn't get or didn't think were funny, or
would talk about drinking and hangovers, the latter of
which everyone else in the room found so interesting.
They would laugh and giggle, and I laughed and
giggled with them without knowing why.  When John
cursed at someone I cursed with him, even though at
times I felt badly for doing so, because I did not know
why the person deserved such a language.  I listened to
his popular rock & roll and jazz music with which I
had previously not been familiar.
      Since I shared a class with John, we often
studied together.  Eventually, I picked up his study
habits.  We would start studying for a test at eleven
o'clock the night before, and would finally finish at
sunrise after two coffee-breaks at a local diner.  John
told me this method of studying was fine if I could get
the hang of it.  His favorite phrase was 'no problem,'
which I quickly adopted.  It was an awfully easy way
of dealing with matters, and I wasn't sure if it was
adequate, but, nonetheless, I kept saying 'no problem'
when handling some difficulty.
      He liked to have me around because in my
presence he felt he was admired.  As I tried to be
accepted into John's world, my world slowly
deteriorated.  I started to become insecure about
myself and I held onto John more tightly.  The whole
world around me slowly deteriorated.  Before I did or
said anything, I would first ask myself, "What would
John do in this situation?" I had fallen head first into
his world.
      John and the other students at the university
enjoyed themselves in ways that seemed unusual to me.
I wanted to enjoy myself as well, but to do so involved
going to parties or bars or to the park with John's
friends while discussing topics I barely understood -
activities that seemed so foreign to me.  Yet I
witnessed how John enjoyed this lifestyle; I asked
myself, "Why couldn't I act this way and also be
happy?"  I was trying to assimilate myself into the
American college scene, but I was only succeeding in
isolating myself from myself.  I slowly became John
whether I liked it or not.

      "It was dimly lit.  The trickle of rays came over
my dorm window.  There was snow outside.  The
sparkling of falling snowflakes lit up outside.  The
white shadow of the snow glowed under the dim light.
The white tree in the courtyard released its white dust
as it gently undulated."
      I suddenly awoke from a dream. I was sweating.
Abruptly shaking my body I looked outside.  As if I
had not awaken from my dream there was snow
outside.  It was still dark.  I opened my window.  The
chilly night air gushed in.  The sky was cloudy.  Yet
the moon could be seen.  I turned on the light on my
dresser.  In the span of darkness my face floated on the
surface of the mirror.  Then suddenly I burst out
laughing.  The glow from my laughter lit the white
snow dust on the mirror.  I laughed into the span of
dark radiance.  I slowly awoke.  Sitting on my desk, I
took out a pen and a piece of paper and wrote a letter
to John.

Dear John,

      When I got up this morning, I burst into fits of
laughter.  As I looked into my own face on my mirror,
I saw John Fisher.  Although I was sure that the nose
was my own, the face that was staring back at me
through that mirror was not mine.  Pinching my cheek,
I stared into my oriental face.  It had high cheekbones,
yellowish skin, a low nose, black hair, and dubious
narrow slanted eyes that were framed in metal glasses.
I was looking at Kan's face through John Fisher's eyes.
      As if you have submerged into my
subconsciousness, I have become a living, walking John
Fisher in Kan's body.  Have I become your willing
slave?  Have I subconsciously desired to be you instead
of me?  Who am I anyway?  I am a living denial of my
own cultural identity.  It seems I have been living
someone else's life.  Where is my life then?  Am I dead?
Not only am I dead, but my denial of my own self
identity takes all of my proud ancestors to my grave.
      Can I commit a sin that is deadlier than this?  Is
there a crime that should be punished more brutally
than this!  My identity is in crisis.  I have lost my
ancestors.  Under the pretense of universality and
assimilation my identity has been invaded and robbed
of its just place on this earth.  Who am I?  There must
be a meaning and a purpose to my life.  What is the
significance of this world that I now live, if there is
not such a meaning and a purpose.
      John, now I embark on a journey only I can
make, with you inside me, to introduce to you the real
Kan.

            Very Truly Yours,

            Kan

      It was a rude awakening discovering, all of a
sudden, that I had forgotten my own self and had
assumed the identity of another.  I began to float in
time, contemplating for the first time the reasons for
my being here in the United States.
      I was an immigrant to this land.  I came here
from Korea when I was sixteen.  The question "Why?"
never entered my mind before.  I simply accepted it as
a fact.  But all of a sudden the question overwhelmed
me.  A sudden chilling fear crept through my spine.  I
had lost sense of who I was.  "What is real?"  I was no
longer real.  But that morning the truth finally slapped
my face.

      I sat on the roof of the science building, gazing
out over the surrounding buildings, revealing an
awesome perspective of a city in miniature before my
eyes.  It was a beautiful spring day.  Yellow and red
blossoms in thick ivory found their homes among red
bricks.  Thick green grass carpeted the miniature city
in squares and triangles.  Students throwing frisbees
punctuated the green carpets below.  My thinking
appeared as crisp, clear, and defined as the outlines of
the surrounding city shapes; I felt I could hear and see
my thoughts as they formed in my mind.  "He must had
been born,"  I said.  Otherwise nothing made sense.
"Unless he had been born already, I could not have
been born," I said aloud.
      John was with me.  "What do you mean?"  He
asked me in his usual abrupt manner.  I burst out
laughing.  Those days whenever I saw his face or heard
his abrupt voice I simply burst out laughing.  He hit
my side with his elbow.  "Hey. . .why are you laughing?
Let me in on this."  He thrust his hand under my face,
feigning a news reporter holding a microphone, but I
was laughing too hard to say anything. "You know
you're really strange these days.  Are you dropping
acid or something?  Especially after the letter.  I mean,
I'm just wondering."  I laughed harder.  Tears rolled
down my cheeks.  Hugging my stomach with my both
hands I laughed uncontrollably, rolling around on my
back.  My head shook up and down wildly.  My face
was hurting.  John eventually joined me in my fits of
laughter.  He and I were tumbling backwards,
momentarily forgetting that we were on a roof far
above the ground.
      I regained my breath for a moment and stood
up and yelled, "John!  He had been born!"
      "Who?  Who the hell are you talking about?"  He
asked me, still laughing.
      "The Lord himself," I answered.  "The Lord of
Heaven and Earth, The Father of Christ, The Maitreya,
the Allah, The Creator."
      Still laughing he said, "Yeah, sure, and it's you,
right?"
      I said, smiling, "No....  But look, John, look at
the world.  It's living."
      He reflected for a moment and returned with a
chuckle, "Dude. . . and I suppose I'm dead, right?"
      "Well, maybe," I said laughing.
      "I think that philosophy class is getting to you
Kan."
      "Well, maybe that too," I said.  "But that is not
the point.  We should be dead by now but we are not.
Have you ever wondered how is it possible that today I
can sit and talk with you face to face and not try to
kill you?  Why, it's a miracle."
      John took a few steps back and held up his
hands.  He announced to the city, "I say this man is
tripping his brains out!"
      "Today we have enough destructive power to
destroy ourselves.  Yet we do not.  Today science
allows us to form a nation constituted with thousands
of different ethnic backgrounds.  John, I dare say He
was born.  He must had been born."  I said with
growing conviction.

      That afternoon I became sick.  My heart was
thumping fast.  I drifted in a huge whirlpool.  My body
shook all over.  I was sweating.  I was lying on my bed
in my dorm room, feeling as if I were floating
underwater.  I felt as if I were being visited by spirits.
I heard chanting.  Then I saw about thirty women
floating above me.  I could not make out their faces.
The women were circling my room with baskets in
their arms.  It looked as if they were gathering fruits.
"How could they all fit in my room?" I thought.  Then
slowly I started to rise.  One of the women held my
hand and pulled me beside her.  Soon we were out on
the street walking together.  People passed by us, but
they did not seem to notice us.  I looked around, trying
to recognize the faces of the women who were with me.
Then I found myself walking alone - the women
disappeared into space.
      There was a pain in my stomach.  It slowly
crawled around and crept into my heart.  Whenever my
heart thumped, it faintly cried.  I could hear the
teardrops falling when my heart thumped.  Walking
down the street, I trembled with a desire.  I thirsted for
a presence.  I knew that Justice was coming because it
had to come.  I longed for it so much I could sense it in
my palm.
      "What is Being and how does Being become
Becoming?" an ascending angel cried in my heart.  "To
Become, a Being had to come.  In order for me to
Become, a Being had to become a Becoming.  A
Becoming Being had to come."  People passed by me
with worries in their head.  They were counting their
worries.  A girl's eyes flashed momentarily when she
saw my question.
      "Where is your Being?" I asked.
      The garbage can answered, "It is in your heart."

      "Where is your Becoming?" I asked.
      "It already came," said the fire-hydrant.  It was
ten after five and people popped out from buildings
like peanuts breaking out from their shells.  Maybe it
is only me unable to live within this boundary, looking
for something that had to come to Become.  I knew
what I was looking for because I knew why I started to
look.  "It hurts me to see injustice.  It hurts me to see a
betrayed man, an enslaved woman and an abandoned
child."  People's worries crawled into my heart.  "Is
tomorrow only an extension of time given to us today?
Or can it Become tomorrow?" I asked.  "For tomorrow
to become today, tomorrow had to come yesterday," I
answered.  "Betrayed history does not provide justice
for tomorrow.  He had to come," I told the ascending
angel in my heart.  "He had to come.  The Lord of
Heaven and Earth had to come to earth as a human
child in order for us to Become," I said with a tender
longing in my voice.
      "Otherwise we have no hope.  We are slaves
under Being without Becoming.  He had to Become a
human being in order for us to Be Becoming.  He had
to Be born as a human child in order for Him to
Become."  I whispered to myself.  "I would like to see a
just world.  A just world had to come.  A world had to
be just.  Yet in order for this world to be just, justice
had to come already.  Otherwise, He will always be
coming without Becoming just."  Thus I knew He came.
"He had to come, since He cannot be coming, and
because He came, I am Becoming."  I atoned into
midair with a sweet breath of knowledge.

      Chapter 8   'TaeUlJu' Meditation.


      A part of me was missing.  I needed to know
who I was.  I knew who the pilgrims were but I did not
know what they meant for me.  I was lost, drifting in
the sea of identities, grabbing hold of passing history
that was not mine.  I had to find my roots in order to
figure out who I was and where I was going.
      I searched through our school library, but there
were not enough books about Korea, so one Sunday
morning I drove into New York City.  I parked the car
on Thirty-second Street and went into a Korean
bookstore.  There were many books in Korean, but not
enough books about Korea itself.  Most of the books
there spoke of Jesus.  I was disappointed.  I wandered
around in the bookstore until I gathered my strength
and asked one of the store clerks whether they carried
books on Korean religion.  He looked at me strangely.
He ran his eyes up and down my body and then
pointed toward the corner section of the book store.
He told me abruptly, "Go over to the Shamanism
section."  Then he turned around and went about his
business.
      I browsed through that section.  There were
couple of picture books about Korean "Moodang"
(Shaman) performing spiritual rituals.  There was also
a book called The Truth of JeungSan Do.  On the cover,
it had claimed that God Himself had come to earth as a
living person, which roused my interest.  I bought a
couple of books on Korean Shamanism and the book
called The Truth of JeungSan Do.

      The book on Shamans did not tell me much, but
the book on JeungSan Do(Tao) left me wondering.  The
book basically called forth for the beginning of a New
Age where people were over and above the power of
gods.  It proclaimed that the man called JeungSan
Kang was the Lord of the Jesus Christ, the Maitreya
Buddha (the future Buddha), and in fact the final
savior, prophesied by all previous religions.  The
author proclaimed that from then on, since the God
Himself had been born on earth in human flesh, the
age of dominant gods were over.  A New Age where
people shall be over and above Gods was about to open
up.
      According to the book a new vision, a new
direction, a new hope was emerging in Korea.  And it
was JeungSan Do.

      The following is a summary on JeungSan Do
according to the book.


      JeungSan Do:

      JeungSan Do was founded in 1911 in Korea by
a woman, the TaeMo Go (Go is Her Last Name)
SuBuNim (SuBuNim is Her Title meaning the First
Lady), who attained Do (Tao, Enlightenment) through
the Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting Meditation.  Her husband,
JeungSan Kang (JeungSan is His Religious Name.
Kang is His Last Name), is the Lord of Heaven and
Earth and gave us the Tae-Ul-Ju Chant.  JeungSan
Kang is the Lord of the Jesus Christ, the Maitreya
Buddha (the future Buddha) and the Emperor of the
Jade Heaven.  He had said; "In Christianity people wait
for the coming of the Jesus, in Buddhism people wait
for the coimg of the Maitreya.  Now no matter who
comes as long as one person comes, they would all
proclaim that their Teacher has come and follow."
      The Lord JeungSan SangJeNim (SangJeNim is
His official Title meaning the Great Supreme Ruling
Lord God of Earth and Heaven) was born in Korea on
November first, 1871.  The Lord JeungSan SangJeNim
came to earth to conduct the necessary Autumnal
Equinox Rituals for what is called the "Coming Cosmic
Fall Time" (WhoChun GaeByuk - The Harvesting of
Time).  He charted the coming events for the current
humanity so people can enter the Coming Cosmic Fall
Time successfully.  After performing all the necessary
Rituals, He died and went back to His throne in the
Jade Heaven on 1909.  Following His death, His Wife,
the TaeMo (TaeMo means Great Mother of the Coming
New Age) Go SuBuNim attained spirituality that was
higher than even Jesus Christ or Buddha had wished to
achieve through the Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting Meditation.
      The JeungSan SangJeNim said that just as there
is one year on earth, our universe has a Cosmic Year
which is 129,600 earthly years.  The prior 60,000 years
are the Cosmic Spring and Summer (SunChun).  The
later 60,000 years are the Cosmic Fall and Winter
(WhoChun).  Right now we live within an age that is at
the end of the Cosmic Summer and are about to enter
the age of the Cosmic Fall.


      During the Cosmic Spring Time human species
come forth from the Yim (female) energy with the help
of the Yang (male) energy.  During the Cosmic Summer
Time the human species grow up by going through
conflicts, contrasts and wars because the Yang energy
dominates the Yim energy.  When the Cosmic Fall Time
comes, the Yim-Yang energies become equal partners.
Human struggles and conflicts cease.  Harmony, peace
and justice prevail.  During the Cosmic Winter Time
the Yim energy dominates.  The ice covers the earth
and the universe prepares for a new Cosmic Year in
Yim.  When the next Cosmic Spring Time comes a new
specie of human beings come forth from the Yim
energy.  This cyclical nature in Time is the prime
reason why we donot find any linking fossils between
the current humanity of Homo Sapiens Sapiens and
with the previous humanity of Neanderthalers.  We are
the result of this Cosmic Year.  And the
Neanderthalers - previous humanity - are the result of
the previous Cosmic Year.  The Neanderthalers became
extinct about 70,000 years ago when the last Cosmic
Year's Cosmic Winter Time came about.  And the
current humanity of Homo Sapiens Sapiens
mysteriously appeared on earth about 40,000 years ago,
at the start of this year's Cosmic Spring Time.
      During the period of this Cosmic Summer, the
Lord of Heaven and Earth, the Supreme Lord
JeungSan Kang (JeungSan SangJeNim), sent to earth
Shamans, Messiahs, Saints, Christs and Buddhas to
teach the people about the Heavenly and the Earthly
order.  However, when the Cosmic Fall Time came
near, the JeungSan SangJeNim realized that the Yang
energy was too dominant during this Cosmic Summer
Time for humans to enter the Coming Cosmic Fall
Time peacefully and to enjoy the fruits of the Cosmic
Summer Time labor.  Thus finally the Lord Himself
was born on earth on 1871 as a human child.  He wore
the flesh of a man because the dominant energy of the
Cosmic Summer Time was Yang.  Yet the prime
purpose of the Rituals of the Lord JeungSan
SangJeNim was to balance the Yim-Yang energy on
earth.  He sought to prepare the human race for the
coming Yim period - the Lord of Heaven and Earth
sought the Yim energy that was great enough to
balance the destructive power of the dominant Yang
energy of this Cosmic Summer Time.
      He found such an energy in the TaeMo Go
SuBuNim.  The Supreme Lord JeungSan Kang
(JeungSan SangJeNim) told us that the biggest tragedy
of this Cosmic Summer Time was the oppressed status
of women.  Women had been the object of the male
whims.  Thus in order to grant the necessary power on
the TaeMo Go SuBuNim for the purpose of balancing
the Yim-Yang energy, The JeungSan SangJeNim
performed the following Rituals when He received The
TaeMo Go SuBuNim as His Wife.

      *     Said the JeungSan SangJeNim on
      November third, 1907, "For fifteen years I've
      devoted my efforts to meet you.  From now on I
      place you in charge of constructing a new order
      in Heaven and Earth"  (p.342, The Truth of
      JeungSan Do).

      *     Taking the TaeMo Go SuBuNim at His
      side, The JeungSan SangJeNim laid red and
      yellow books in front of them to left and right.
      Stepping on the books, they walked out from
      the room to the courtyard.  Looking at the stars
      to the south, He asked The TaeMo Go SuBuNim
      to bow four times.  And then again, laying the
      books backwards, they stepped on the books
      when they returned to the room.  After this
      ritual, He taught Her all important matters.
      While teaching Her how to write, He guided the
      brush in Her hand  (p.342, The Truth of
      JeungSan Do).

      *     One day the JeungSan SangJeNim stood
      facing North and had the TaeMo Go SuBuNim
      stand facing South.  In between them a table
      with a goblet of rice wine was placed.  And
      then, after writing many words, He placed the
      enscripted papers on the table.  Then they
      bowed to each other  (p.343).

      *     One day the JeungSan SangJeNim laid
      down on the floor and asked the TaeMo Go
      SuBuNim to sit upon His stomach.  Then He had
      Her ask Him the following question while
      aiming a kitchen knife at His stomach.  "Would
      you allow me to be the First and give me the
      necessary authority over all matters?"  To such
      a demand the JeungSan SangJeNim consented.
      He spoke, "My words shall echo to the ends of
      the universe.  There shall not be any deviation
      to today's promise."  He had Mr. DoSam Lee, Mr.
      JungJun Im and Mr. KyungSuk Cha bore
      witness to this ritual  (p.312).

      The original home town of the TaeMo Go
SuBuNim is JangTaek town.  She was born with the
name, PanRyeu Go, on 1880 March 26 in the province
of Chonla, DamYangGun county, MuMyunSungDoLi
city.  Her father's name was DukSam Go.  Her mother's
last name was Kwon.  When TaeMo Go's Mother was
praying in May of 1879, she had a dream of going up
to a high mountain.  She went into a high house where
a high government official gave her a red book and a
yellow book.  After this experience she bore the TaeMo
Go suBuNim (Go means highness in Korean).
      After the death of our Lord JeungSan
SangJeNim, the TaeMo Go SuBuNim founded a New
Religion that could truly unite all human races on
earth as well as all spirits, deities and gods in Heaven.
She founded a religion that shall last for 50,000 years
into the Coming Cosmic Fall period.  The Religion of
the Cosmic Fall Time was founded by a woman
because the coming period is the Time of Yim.
      Our TaeMo Go SuBuNim founded the New
Religion because the function of all previous religions
had been served.  Christianity, Buddhism and
Confucianism as institutions all had their purposes in
maintaining a proper order in our society.  However,
their views on Heaven, Earth and Human Mind had
become outdated.  They no longer could perform social
enlightenment in this age of Change and Harvest.  The
JeungSan SangJeNim was the first man of the Coming
Yim Age.  And the TaeMo Go SuBuNim was the
woman who founded the New Religion in preparation
of the Coming Yim Age.
      The JeungSan SangJeNim released people from
the order of old religions.  Thus, people are free from
the structured moral obligations.  They are free to do
as they wish.  However, just as we harvest the crops
when the fall comes, the TaeMo Go SuBuNim founded
a new religion in order to harvest the human crops
when the Cosmic Fall Time comes.  And because now
people are free to do what they want, it is entirely up
to each individual human being as to whether she or he
can be harvested or not.
      The TaeMo Go SuBuNim founded a new
religion in preparation of the Coming Cosmic Fall.
When the Cosmic Fall Time comes, actual physical
changes occur to earth and to humans.  The earth's axis
itself shifts its position.  Right now it is leaning 23.5
degrees in the Yang direction.  When the Cosmic Fall
Time comes, the axis shifts upright, bringing about
equality in Yim and Yang relationship in our
environment.  When this shift occurs, there will be 360
days in a year instead of 365 days because the earth
shall circle the sun at a perfect 360 degree circle.  The
moon calendar and the sun calendar will both be 360
days.  Right now we have altogether 365 parts in our
body; but when the axis shifts upright, there will be
360 parts in our body.  Women menstruate every
month, causing much physical and mental pain.  One
of the major changes in our bodily parts will be that
women will only be ovulating once or twice in their
lives.
      However, before we enter the Cosmic Fall Time,
the current humanity needs to be Harvested.  Just as
the farmer harvests his crops when the fall comes, the
TaeMo Go SuBuNim founded a new religion in order
to Harvest the human crops when the Cosmic Fall Time
comes.
       Those who refuse to seek or to take pride in
their own roots cannot be Harvested.  There cannot be
a fruit without the root.  The descendants of those who
had done wrong to others have one last chance to
correct the wrong-doings of their ancestors.  Even if a
part of the root is rotting away, if its fruit is healthy,
there is a chance of harvest and rebirth.  However, if
the fruit is rotten, then neither the fruit nor the root
can be harvested.  JeungSan Do(Tao) is the final Truth
in this age of the Coming Cosmic Fall Time.
      When the Cosmic Fall Time comes, the old shall
be young again.  Our lives shall be lengthened.  The
truly attained ones might even live to be 50,000 years
old.  Our deceased ancestors shall ascend to earth in
their spiritual form and will be living with their
Harvested descendants on earth.  All individuals will
have attained spirituality that are higher than even
Jesus or Buddha had attained.  The Harvested
humanity shall construct the Highest Heaven on Earth.
Humanity shall live in collective spirituality in the
midst of high scientific development.

      At first reading I did not quite know what to
make of this book.  Yet this book reminded me of the
book "The Path of the Pole" by the professor Hapgood of
the University of New Hampshire and other books that
talked of Axis shifting.
      According to the Professor Hapgood's book,
from about 120,000 years ago till about 80,000 years
ago the north pole was in Canada's Yukon district
(63'N, 135'W).  Reflecting on The Truth of JeungSan Do
book, this means that during the last Cosmic Fall Time
the north pole was in Canada's Yukon territory.
Professor Hapgood further claims that the north pole
was in the Greenland Sea (72'N, 10'E) from 75,000
years ago till 55,000 ago.  This is during the Cosmic
Winter Time according to JeungSan Do.  Then
Professor Hapgood claims that the north pole was in
the Hudson Bay area (60'N, 73'W) from 50,000 years
ago until about 15,000 years ago.  This time period is
from this Cosmic year's Spring Time until the Cosmic
Summer Time came.  Professor Hapgood concludes that
the current pole position has been at its current
location for only the past 15,000 years.  This means
there was another axis shift from the Cosmic Spring
time to our present Cosmic Summer Time.

      Doctor Albert Einstein, who wrote the preface
to Professor Hapgood's book, states in his letter to
Professor Hapgood that "I find your arguments very
impressive and have the impression that your
hypothesis is correct.  One can hardly doubt that
significant shifts of the crust of the earth have taken
place repeatedly and within a short time.  The
empirical material you have compiled would hardly
permit another interpretation."
      At first when I read the Professor Hapgood's
book, I was at best skeptical.  But now I was more than
surprised to find out that what JeungSan Do claimed
about axis shifting exactly correlated with the
professor's findings.  I was at first skeptical of the
professor's findings because it did not make much
sense to me as to why the earth would all of a sudden
shift its axis.  But The Truth of JeungSan Do book
provided me with a reason and a purpose for such a
shift.  The shifting of the axis was a natural process of
maturing for the living mother earth!  Doctor Einstein
did provide a probable scientific explanation for a
sudden shift in the axis in the preface of the book: "A
great many empirical data indicate that at each point
on the earth's surface that has been carefully studied,
many climatic changes have taken place, apparently
quite suddenly.  This, according to Hapgood, is
explicable if the virtually rigid outer crust of the earth
undergoes, from time to time, extensive displacement
over the viscous, plastic, possibly fluid inner layers.
Such displacements may take place as the consequence
of comparatively slight forces exerted on the crust,
derived form the earth's momentum of rotation, which
in turn will tend to alter the axis of rotation of the
earth's crust."  Previously I had thought that even
though they are scientifically sound explanations,
Hapgood and Einstein's explanations lacked the proper
motive for such a meaningless action on the part of our
universe.  The Truth of JeungSan Do book gave me a
reason to think about Hapgood's findings.
      I thought it interesting that even though his
book did not mention about the spiritual aspect, his
findings concurred in the physical arena of the mother
earth's activities with JeungSan Do's Cosmic Season
theory.  I was definitely intrigued by The Truth of
JeungSan Do book and read further with a great
enthusiasm.

      The Truth of JeungSan Do book spoke further on
our current crisis due to human ignorance of the
Cosmic Season and called forth for a renewed
spirituality.


      Our Crisis:

      Today we face the destruction of our own
environment.  Our earth is overpopulated; there are
now five billion of us living on this earth and at least
80 million more people are being born every year.  Our
natural resources are limited.  Destruction of natural
habitat is inevitable.  At least one hundred species of
plants and animals face the fate of extinction every
day.  The lands that are given to us and the energy
sources that are known to us are finite.  Our
environment can no longer sustain our strange notion
of paradise which is predicated upon our domination
of nature.
      The results are pouring in.  Famine in the midst
of an overabundance of food has become reality.  The
inevitable waste due to human consumption strangle
the  environment.  Millions of tons of household
garbage and toxic waste are dumped into our
backyards and into our water supply.  The fluorine
compound gases from our hair spray and our
refrigerators destroy the earth's ozone layer; there is a
hole in the sky above the Antarctica that is larger than
the United States due to the depletion of the ozone
layer.  If such a hole was to move to a more populated
area, the outbursts of unknown deadly new diseases
are to be expected.
      In private, we destroy our own human habitat.
The outburst of crime, divorce, drugs and abortion
destroy the natural rhythm of human existence.
Previously unknown deadly new diseases such as AIDS
threaten our livelihood.  The dearth of spirituality in
modern life generates a humanity that has lost its own
identity.  We have lost our roots.  We have lost our
myths.  We have lost our rituals.  We have lost our
ancestors.  We have become the uprooted trees.  We
have become the burned down forests.  With every
extinction of natural life, we lose a part of ourselves.
We forget who we are.  We have become "man-made".
We need to renew our spirituality.  It is more urgent
than ever.

      The book then talked of a chant, Tae-Ul-Ju, or
Song of Life, an integral and extremely powerful facet
of JeungSan Do.  It said that before we enter the
Cosmic Fall Time, the current humanity needs to be
Harvested.  The Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting was the song of
our Farmer harvesting the humanity for the Coming
Cosmic Fall Time.  It asked to chant softly but with a
firm conviction.


      Tae-Ul-Ju(Chant) Song of Life Chant:

  Hum-Chi Hum-Chi Tae-Ul-Chun-Sang-Won-Gun,
      (Take a deep breath)
  Hum-Ri-Chi-Ya-Do-Rae Hum-Ri-Ham-Ri-Sa-Pa-Aha.
      (Take a deep breath)

      I wasn't sure about what chanting could achieve
or even how to chant, but the book answered my many
questions about chanting, informing me as well as
enlightening me.


      Tae-Ul-Ju(Chant) Chanting Meditation:

      The Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting Meditation is the first
step toward attaining high spirituality.  The Tae-Ul-Ju
Chanting is the song of this humanity preparing for
the Harvest of the Coming Cosmic Fall Time.  It is the
song of nature seeking Justice of the Coming Cosmic
Fall Time.  It is the sound of universe suckling on the
breasts of the mother earth.  The Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting
evokes the necessary oneness with nature, with
universe, with the Cosmic Season and with the
harmonious mind of ourselves.
      Chanting is a way to absorb the energy of the
spiritual world.  The Tae-Ul-Ju Chant possesses the
most spiritual power among all known chants.  By
continually repeating the Tae-Ul-Ju Chant, one
breathes in the strong natural energy of earth and
heaven.  Tae-Ul-Ju is the chant that harvests humanity
when the Cosmic Fall Time comes.  It is the process of
ripening humanity.  If the sound of Tae-Ul-Ju is
embedded in one, one will be healthy and be without
sudden diseases, disasters or accidents.  Reading Tae-
Ul-Ju is beneficial not only when meditating, but also
when walking, driving or working; one will be able to
feel the natural rhythm of one's own life.  The Tae-Ul-
Ju is the sound of this  universe seeking its mother.
The Tae-Ul-Ju is the spiritual food of our universe.
      The Supreme Lord JeungSan SangJeNim had
following Words to say about Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting
Meditation.

      *     "Sleep less and practice Tae-Ul-Ju
      Chanting Meditation.  It is the Supreme King of
      Heaven.  For fifty thousand years to come Tae-
      Ul-Ju shall be read by all schools on earth"
      (p.399).

      *     "I have tested Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting and
      Woon-Jang-Ju Chanting.  You shall practice
      them daily.  I have resolved the disaster of
      ByungWook Kim with Tae-Ul-Ju and the
      trouble of HyuSoon Chang with Woon-Jang-Ju.
      Tae-Ul-Ju shall open the gate of salvation even
      if you have violated the law of nature and
      Woon-Jang-Ju shall open the prison gate even if
      you are convicted for murder"  (p.397).

      *     "No matter what you chant it is good as
      long as you have faith in that Chanting"
      (p.396).

      The book came bundled with a Tae-Ul-Ju
Chanting Meditation tape so one can chant along.  The
book said that even simply listening to the tape would
be good for me.


      Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting Meditation Tape:

      The Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting Meditation tape is
made so you can chant along.  However, simply
listening to the tape while at home, at office or driving
in a car will help ease fatigue.  It will allow you to
concentrate on your everyday creative activities.
After listening to it regularly, you will detect a
noticeable improvement in your self-esteem.  Of
course, if you can chant along, that would be more
beneficial.  Even after one session of chanting
meditation, your body and mind will thank you for the
effort.  You will feel refreshed, relaxed and confident.

      To heighten the experience of chanting, the
book introduced a method I could easily follow,
starting with the selection of a meditation bowl.


      Method of Chanting:

      Choose a bowl that is clean and set aside this
bowl as your spiritual bowl.  You are going to offer
spiritual water in this bowl to the JeungSan SangJeNim
(the Supreme Ruling Lord God of Earth and Heaven)
and the TaeMo Go SuBuNim.  Pour bottled water or
purified water into the bowl and place it toward the
direction of your head when you sleep.  Bow four times
toward the spiritual bowl using the motion of
upholding the heaven and embracing the earth.  At the
fifth bow, while  embracing the earth, atone the
following prayer.


Prayer from the Heart

JeungSan SangJeNim!
You are the ever Renewing God, the Maitreya,
the Ruler of Earth and Heaven
who have incarnated into this human world
from the Heavenly Throne
in order to open the Coming New Age of Peace and Harmony.
TaeMoNim!
You are the mother of all life on Earth and Heaven
in this time of New Beginning.

I wish to be a righteous and sincere JeungSan Do Worker.
Please forgive sins and misdeeds of my previous lives.
I repent sins and misdeeds of this life.
Free me from the wrath of vengeful spirits and evil intentions.
Let our forefathers rest in peace by fulfilling their wishes.
And show my ancestors and descendants
to the New Path of the Coming Justice.

After the period of hardships and relief,
the impending time of disaster is near at hand.
I will save my parents, brothers and sisters.
I will stand firmly above an unyielding faith
through the utmost devotions and respects.
Following the Law of Returning to the Origin
I will meditate with a single will the life-giving Truth
that unifies the role of Sovereign, Master and Father.
I will save the suffering mankind and lead them
to the coming fifty thousand years of the Cosmic Fall Time.
May your Holy Grace shine upon my path
toward the Truth of JeungSanDo.


      After the prayer facing the bowl, kneel or sit in
a cross-legged position.  Put your hands on your knees.
Your eyes should be closed.  Chant by repeating after
the chanting tape.  Always keep your back straight
while chanting.   Chant for at least thirty minutes.
And try to chant at least twice a day.  It is important
that you get the hang of the tone of the chanting.
After chanting pour out the water in the spiritual bowl
into another cup and drink it.  The water is good for
your health.  If you are chanting with a group of
people, chant in unison.

      Comforting while instructing those who are
new to chanting, the text offered ideas to be aware of
and things to keep in mind when one chants.


      Things to be aware of when chanting:

      We live in a world that is filled with spirits.
Because Tae-Ul-Ju calls upon spiritual power, some
people who are more spiritually inclined will hear
their guiding spirits chanting with them (especially at
night).  Don't be alarmed or frightened!  It is only
natural that one hears them.  Those who are more
sexually inclined will see men and women of their
dreams while in Chanting Meditation.  One need not
fight such visions.  Simply let them pass by.

      The book spoke of different stages of
attainment one may reach through this meditation.


      Different stages of spirituality:

      As one chants regularly, one may reach
different stages of spirituality.
      The first stage of Do (Tao, Attainment) may
occur after about three weeks of daily exercises of
Chanting Meditation.  One will notice that one's
spiritual energy has gathered at the bottom part of
one's stomach.  One will feel warmth being generated
within one's body while in Chanting Meditation.  Also,
one's body may itch all over, because many spirits that
have entered into one's body are playing around with
each other inside the body.
      For the Second Stage of Do, proper instruction
from an expert is recommended.  After three months of
daily exercises of Chanting Meditation, the chanter
will notice that one's spiritual energy has started to
move upward through the spine. One will feel a
burning sensation in one's back.  For some people with
pure hearts, an out of body journey into the spiritual
realm may occur.
      Today we live in a society that exerts great
amount of mental pressure on us.  Our heads are filled
with excessive 'fire' energy.
The natural way to relieve
such stress is to bring down
the excessive 'fire' energy
from the head and to bring
up our naturally pure
'water' energy that we all
carry around at the bottom
part of our stomach.  The
Chanting Meditation
effectively performs such a
function.  The burning
sensation in the middle of
the back spine is due to the movement in both energies.
After the meditation session if you look into a mirror,
you will be able to see your face glowing with a bright
aura.
      Unfortunately, after having realized what
Chanting Meditation can do for them, at the second
stage many people become arrogant, obsessive and
greedy about their spiritual power.  A word of
warning: those who do so will find their spiritual
power gone overnight!
      Proper instruction from an expert and a group
chanting is required for attainment of the Third Stage
of Do.  After three years of daily exercises of
Chanting Meditation, one will notice that one's
spiritual energy has firmly lodged between one's
eyebrows.  One will see a bright light radiating
towards oneself while in Chanting Meditation.  Some
fellow practitioners say that when they read books,
words and letters pop out of the books and start
dancing around to illustrate what they mean.  More
advanced practitioners shall be able to travel
spiritually at will while leaving the body in
meditation.
      The final attainment of Do requires more than
Chanting Meditation.  One will be in harmony with
one's own spirituality as well as with the spirituality
of others around.  One will be able to see the past and
future in the present.  One will be able to form a
collective consciousness among people in order to
Harvest them for the Coming Cosmic Fall Time.

      To paint a more complete picture of the breadth
of JeungSan Do, the volume discussed how diseases are
related to the neglect of the cleansing of one's spiritual
self, and more importantly, how Tae-Ul-Ju chanting
remedies such states of neglect before the diseases
overwhelm the afflicted.


      The Diseases Among Us:

      Deadly new modern diseases and afflictions,
such as heart attacks, cancer and AIDS, all have their
origins in malfunctioning spirituality.  Of course, they
are due to certain viruses that attack our internal
physical organs.  However, our bodies, when
functioning properly, are capable of resisting most
diseases.
      Blocked arteries directly cause heart attacks.
Yet modern science reveals that high levels of stress
due to increased pressure in our modern lifestyle
brings about high blood pressure, which in turn causes
a blocked artery.  Prolonged headaches are symptoms
of this stress, which builds up the excessive 'fire'
energy in the upper head, in turn causing headaches
and red eyes.  JeungSan Do Chanting Meditation
effectively circulates the spiritual energy within our
bodies by bringing up the 'water' energy from the
bottom part of our stomach to our upper head.  The
'water' energy cleanses our body and soul by leading
the white blood cells within the blood stream, killing
off the unnecessary cells and viruses.  The 'water'
energy is the spiritual eye of the white blood cells.  If
one does not awaken the 'water' energy and circulate it
within one's body through proper exercises or
meditation, our white blood cells will not function
properly, causing heart attacks.  It is the 'water' energy
that cleanses one's body and soul.  Chanting Meditation
should be a part of our everyday daily activities.  We
brush our teeth and shower every day, yet most of us
neglect to cleanse our internal body.
      The 'fire' energy, which directs the red blood
cells, provides the necessary energy to nurture our
body.  However, indiscriminate and excessive
nurturing not only causes heart attacks but also cancer
as well.  A blocked artery is due to the nurturing of
protein cells within the blood stream instead of
cleansing them.  Cancer is caused by nurturing tumor
cells.  Instead of destroying the tumors with the white
blood cells, the patient's unawakened spiritual eye
mistakenly thinks that the tumor cells are injured cells
that need to be nurtured.  Thus the excessive 'fire'
energy sends the red blood cells to the tumor cells and
allows them to grow and multiply.  A properly
functioning body requires the awakened spiritual eye
to channel the 'water' energy to cleanse and kill off
the viruses within us with the white blood cells.
      AIDS is caused by the total destruction of the
'water' energy.  Once the 'water' energy dries off from
a person, the white blood cells cannot function at all.
The body's immune system, which fights bacteria,
breaks down as one's will to live breaks down.  The
individual's body will dry off and wither away just
like the falling leaves in Autumn.  This is why AIDS
patients have discolored bodies just like the Autumn
leaves.  Once the 'water' energy is depleted, it cannot
be brought back to that person.  Fallen leaves cannot
be reattached to a tree.  Yet for some HIV positive
patients whose immune system has not been completely
destroyed, constant chanting of Tae-Ul-Ju can
effectively stop the eventual break down in immune
system.
      The Harvesting of humanity for the Coming
Cosmic Fall Time necessarily accompanies diseases and
deaths.  We are susceptible to diseases when the season
changes.  The JeungSan SangjeNim told us that right
before the Cosmic Fall Time comes, a deadly new
disease will wipe out current humanity.  He told us to
know the Cure.  It is important for us to cleanse our
body and soul daily through the Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting
Meditation.

      In the end the book encouraged the forming of
a meditation group and asked serious chanters to
contact the JeungSan Do Headquarters in Korea.


      Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting Meditation Group:

      Those who are serious about Chanting
Meditation should form a JeungSan Do Tae-Ul-Ju
Meditation Group in their area.  If one chants with a
group of people, a collective energy gets formed which
generates a collective will toward Justice.  The workers
of JeungSan Do strongly encourage those who are
interested to contact us at the following address.  We
are looking for socially conscious people who can share
the responsibility of Harvesting current humanity in
order for us to construct a New World in the Coming
Cosmic Fall Time.

      The address was in Korea, which reminded me
of how far away I was from where I was born.

      Address:

      JeungSan DoJang Temple HeadQuarters
      123-2 KwayJengDong, JungGu
      TaeJeon City, South Korea
      Tel: [phone]

      To get rid of this far away feeling, I decided to
begin chanting.  Playing the tape, I tried to emulate the
repetitive chant.  I wasn't sure about what would
happen, but I kept chanting and chanting,
contemplating  the meaning of this new religion,
imagining what it would be like to actually get in
touch with my ancestor's spirits; my roots.  I kept
thinking of the Cosmic Fall Time, and how the religion
stressed the need to be harvested.  The idea of the fire
and water energy kept recurring in my mind.  I
wondered what it meant to absorb energy from the
spiritual world.  I felt the best way to understand these
concepts was to experience them myself.
      After about three weeks of Tae-Ul-Ju
Meditation, one night suddenly I felt a bolt of energy
coming up through my spine.  I never felt anything
like it before.  I had also noticed that I gradually
began to hear spirits chanting with me.  It scared me at
first but eventually I felt natural to be chanting the
Tae-Ul-Ju.
      Chapter 9   The JeungSan SangJeNim and His New
Government in Heaven.


      According to the book, the JeungSan SangJeNim
was born on November first, 1871 at Sonbaraegi town,
Gakmangli Village, Woodukmun County, Gobu
Province, Chonlabukdo State.  The following is a brief
summary on His life and deeds on earth.

      A farmer  whose name was HeungJoo Kang had
a wife by the name of YangDuk Gwon.  She had the
vision of a huge fire falling from the sky into her
body which lit up the Heaven and Earth when she
conceived the Supreme Lord JeungSan SangJeNim.  She
was pregnant with the child for thirteen months.  When
giving birth to the JeungSan SangJeNim, two angels
descended from Heaven to assist the mother YangDuk
in her labor.  For seven days the bright light and the
scent of the angels emanated from the house.
      The Supreme Lord's name is IlSun Kang, which
means single innocence.  The Lord's religious name is
JeungSan Kang, which signifies the pot that heats and
cooks all harvests to create the highest truth.  And His
official religious title is SangJeNim which means the
Supreme Ruling Lord God of Earth and Heaven.  Since
childhood He loved nature and He enjoyed planting
trees.  When He was seven, while watching the
Farmer's Dancing Ritual, His spirit was awakened.
Since then He often enjoyed watching the Farmer's
Autumnal Equinox Dance Rituals even though He did
not enjoy other dances much.
      Once He was visiting a Buddha temple called
Song-Kang-Sa and a monk treated Him disrespectfully.
He was outraged and announced, "You immoral monks
claim to be Buddhists yet you do not know how to
respect a human being!"  He pushed the main pole
holding the roof, shifting it by a meter.  The alarmed
monks apologized to Him.  Despite the monks' repeated
attempts to fix the disjunctured pole, it still remains to
this day slanted.
      When He became thirty-one, after having
traveled to the various parts of the country, He
realized He must necessarily restructure current order
of Heaven and Earth in order to save the humanity
from self-destruction.  He needed to find the proper
solution to lead the humanity into the Cosmic Fall
Time.  He retreated into the Dae-Won Temple of MoAk
mountain for forty-nine days.  After contemplation
and meditation He was awakened to the understanding
of Humane Justice on July fifth.
      "From now on the ways of Heaven and Earth
shall provide justice for all spirits and place them in
their rightful position," He declared after His
Awakening.  During the time of Cosmic Summer even
the spiritual world was divided by region, by people
and by beliefs.  Now that the Cosmic Fall Time was
coming, the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim first unified
the Heavenly order by assigning spirits in their proper
roles according to their achievements in Heaven.  "Now
all nine Heavens are in their proper places," said the
JeungSan SangJeNim after assigning all spirits in
Heaven in their rightful positions.  By assigning all
spirits to their rightful positions, the Lord JeungSan
SangJeNim constructed the "United Federation of
Heavenly Government", organized in the following
hierarchy:  1) the leading spirits of nations, cultures
and religions;  2) the spirits who reign over a region;
3) the spirits that had unfulfilled desires and wishes on
earth;  4) the spirits that led revolutionary ideas; and
5) the head spirits of family names.


      1)  The leading spirits of nations, cultures and
religions.

      The JeungSan SangJeNim assigned those spirits
that professed to the highest achievement for human
civilization to the highest position within their
cultural domains.  In Lord JeungSan SangJeNim's
words;

      *     "Taoism, Buddhism, Confucianism and
      Christianity became the basis of all civilization.
      And now I place SuWoon Choi as the head of
      Taoism, Mook Jin as the head of Buddhism,
      Hsian Chu (Hsi Ju) as the head of
      Confucianism, and Matteo Ricci as the head of
      Christianity.  They shall gather the real purpose
      behind today's defunct rituals.  They shall lead
      other attained spirits within their religions and
      pick out the basic roots of different sects and
      religious practices that have emerged through
      different cultures.  They shall provide the basis
      for unified truth by uncovering the root of all
      cultural and religious practices"  (p.252).

      Since the SangJeNim had given out this ruling,
those people who had devoted their lives to a specific
religious faith have found out after their death that in
Heaven, the spirits that they had faithfully believed in
had been replaced by the above spiritual leaders.
      The JeungSan SangJeNim especially applauded
the actions of the Jesuit Priest Matteo Ricci.  While
Ricci was living on earth he desired to build Heaven
on Earth in China.  He was instrumental in bringing
Western scientific civilization to the East.  He tried to
construct not only a spiritually wealthy but also
materially wealthy nation on China.  However, he
failed due to the stubborn, static nature of oriental
culture.  He only succeeded in opening up cultural
exchange of Asia and Europe.  After his death, he took
the attained spirits of the East to the West and opened
the way to scientific development for the West.  Yet
the West began to abuse scientific achievement and set
out to conquer nature and other nations and people of
the world.  Thus finally Matteo Ricci sought out the
help of the JeungSan SangJeNim in harvesting current
humanity.

      *     The JeungSan SangJeNim had following
      words to say about the works of Matteo Ricci.
      "Western man Matteo Ricci came to the East to
      construct Heaven on earth.  He suggested many
      ways; yet they were not used.  He was not able
      to attain his goal.  He only succeeded in opening
      up Heaven and Earth to the ways of the East
      and the West.  From then on the regional spirits
      who guarded their territories with zeal were
      able to cross borders to other regions.  After his
      death he took the attained spirits of the East to
      the West to build Heaven on earth.  Since then
      the people from underground came up to
      Heaven to learn scientific methods and the
      underground people 'opened ears' (gave
      inspirations) for the humanity on earth.  All
      current scientific achievement originated form
      such insights.  Thus humanity was able to copy
      the Heavenly civilization on earth.  However,
      this civilization only opened eyes toward
      profits and material gains.  It only contributed
      to furthering the arrogance, wickedness and
      greed in human nature.  Humanity started to
      break away from the law of Heaven and Earth.
      Now it is engulfing the way of nature,
      committing every conceivable sins and crimes
      under the name of wealth.  The way of the
      spirits have been violated.  Heavenly rule and
      human nature have been violated.  Thus Matteo
      Ricci gathered all great spirits of the old and
      new, and they all came up to the Ninth Heaven
      in order to beg of me to correct the violated
      humanity.  Thus I came down through India's
      Heavenly Tower and toured the world.  Finally
      I stopped in this land where the Buddhist monk
      Jin Pyo devoted his life at Moak Mountain,
      Kumsan Temple for me to come down as a
      human child.  I stayed in the Maitreya statue of
      the Kumsan Temple for thirty years.  While
      there, I commended SuWoon Choi to correct the
      violated humanity; yet he was not able to step
      outside the boundary of Confucianism to open
      the Great Unified Truth.  Thus in 1864 I
      withdrew my commandments to him.  And
      finally I came down to earth as a human child
      in 1871"  (p.59,60).

      Matteo Ricci was instrumental in bringing
about the birth of the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim on
earth.  And his deeds both on earth and in heaven were
critical in bringing about our current civilization.
Thus the JeungSan SangJeNim replaced Jesus with
Matteo Ricci as the head of Christianity in heaven.
After death the followers of Christ find, to their
surprise, that Jesus no longer heads the world of
Christianity in Heaven.  They find Christianity is
under the leadership of Mateo Ricci.
      Mook Jin was a Buddhist Monk who lived in
Korea from 1562 to 1633.  He desired to build a
unified world by collecting the energies of different
cultures.  Leaving his body in meditation, his soul
traveled to the West to study the laws and rituals of
other worlds.  However, during his absence, his body
was burned and cremated by BongGuk who was jealous
of Mook Jin's achievements.  After discovering that his
body had been cremated when he returned from his
out of body journey, he swore to the Lord in Heaven
that he shall leave this land.  He took the attained
spirits of Asia and went to the West and developed the
Western civilization.  To acknowledge his achievements
and to resolve his unfulfilled wish on Korea, the Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim replaced Buddha with Mook Jin
as the head of Buddhism.
      Both Matteo Ricci and Mook Jin tried to build
their ideal Heaven on Earth in Asia.  However, they
both failed due to the jealously close-minded culture
of the Orient.  Thus after death they both devoted
their efforts in the West, succeeding in nurturing
further scientific development.
      Hsi Ju (1130-1200) collected numerous and
diverse writings on Confucian ethics and rituals.  Then
he composed a Confucian book that embraced all
human affairs.  His book sketched proper conduct on
human relationships.  For this achievement the Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim replaced Confucius with Hsi Ju
as the head of Confucianism.
      Suwoon Choi created DongHak - Eastern
Religion - under the direct commandment of Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim.  It announced the coming of the
Lord JeungSan SangJeNim and the Cosmic Fall time.
It taught that every man is a god and tried to build
Heaven on Earth.  To acknowledge such a faithful
devotion, the JeungSan SangJeNim placed him as the
leader of Taoism.
      IlBu Kim received the Hexagram of the Coming
Cosmic Fall Time and concluded the study on I-Ching.
He also recognized the young JeungSan as the Lord
SangJeNim when they met together.  The Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim placed him as the head of the
I-Ching way.


      2)  The Ruling spirits of the Region.

      The Supreme Lord JeungSan SangJeNim said,
"The reason for the conflicts and wars among
neighboring people was because the ruling spirits of
the regions were in conflict.  Thus now I am promoting
the peace among regional spirits as the first step
toward peace among mankind."  Thus the JeungSan
SangJeNim created The Heavenly Government in order
to unify different cultures and races.  The ruling
spirits of the region are the guiding ancestral gods of
the region, the people and the race.  And many myths
have been created in their honor.
      Yahweh is the ruling spirit of the Jewish
people.  DanGun is the ruling spirit of the Korean
people.  AnPaGyun HwanIn is the ancient cultural
spirit that rules over all regional ruling spirits.
AnPaGyun HwanIn resided on TienShan mountain
9000 years ago.  He was the first person in history who
was awakened to the truth of Trinity, and his
teachings on the holy tri-spirit became the foundation
to all religions, cultures and civilizations on earth.
      These ancestral regional spirits are the
caretakers of their own people and they are the major
power and force of the Heavenly Government.  It is
crucial to know and identify one's own ancestors.
Now, because we are returning to our roots, anyone
who denies or abandons one's own ancestral regional
spirits cannot survive into the Coming New Age of the
Cosmic Fall Time.

      3)  The spirits that had unfulfilled desires, and
wishes on earth.

      The Lord JeungSan SangJeNim identified
WoonJang Kwan as the man who signified justice.
Thus he was placed in charge of all spirits that had
unfulfilled desires, and wishes on earth.  He would
decide whether the unfulfilled desires deserved
fulfillment.  Then he would serve justice by allowing
or preventing the spirits from gaining their wishes on
earth through people.  Sometimes their desires could
only be fulfilled through vengeful means, which could
translate into accidents or disasters for some people.
The Lord JeungSan SangJeNim reminded people on
earth that whenever they are accosted with the threat
of the evil intentions of spirits, people should call upon
WoonJang Kwan for help by chanting the Woon-Jang-
Ju(Chant) Song of Life.

      Woon-Jang-Ju(Chant) Song of Life Chant:

      *     "This is the power chant."

   Chun-Ha-Young-Woong-Kwan-Woon-Jang
   Ui-Mak-Che  Gun-Chung  Chun-Gi-Pal-Wee-Je-Jang
      (Take a deep breath)
   Yuk-Jung  Yuk-Gap  Yuk-Byung  Yuk-Ul
   So-Sol-Je-Jang  Il-Byul-Byung-Young-Sa-Gi
      (Take a deep breath)
   Um-Um-Kup-Kup  Yu-Wul-Lyung  Sa-Pa-Aha.
      (Take a deep breath)




      4) The spirits that led revolutionary ideas.

      MyungSuk Jun is the ruling spirit of the
revolutionaries. Lord JeungSan SangJeNim classified
revolutionary spirits as those who were made by time
and situation.  They were the ones who tried to better
the given situation.  However, because of the nature of
the given time they were not successful.  Concerning
the revolutionary spirits, the Lord JeungSan
SangJeNim has said, "Just because some revolutionaries
had failed, it did not mean that their intentions were
not novel.  All revolutionaries attempted to further
fellow human beings.  Thus even in names one should
never dishonor them."


      5)  The ruling spirits of family names.

      For every surname, there is a founder of that
surname; and the founders of surnames reign as the
direct ancestral spirits.  They are the guardians of
their descendants.  The very first surname was Poong -
meaning wind; however, it does not have descendants
today.  The next oldest surname was Kang; that is why
the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim was born on earth with
the surname Kang.
Chapter 10  Spirit Journey


      It must had been about three monthes since I
had started chanting TaeUlJu Song of Life.  By then
TaeUlJu Chanting became part of my daily exercises.
I was not quite sure what to think of JeungSan Do;
nevertheless, I enjoyed chanting TaeUlJu.  It gave me
renewed energy in my school activities.  One night at
around two in the morning, I could not fall asleep.  I
was thinking about the book The Truth of JeungSan Do.
Sometimes the book made sense to me, and sometimes it
did not.  After about an hour of lying in my bed
unable to fall asleep, I decided to read the TaeUlJu
chant.  I offered the purified water and started
chanting.  Those days whenever I chanted late at night,
I heard spirits chanting with me.  At first it scared me,
but later on I looked forward to their chant.  After
about thirty minutes of chanting, suddenly my eyes
opened up and I saw myself rising out of my body.
      Even though my body was still in meditation, I
was walking out of my room.  When I opened my door,
there was only a vast span of dark emptiness.
Suddenly a cloud lifted me up and two bright lights in
the shape of people held me by my arms.  After a brief
moment we came upon a dark alley.  Only a dim light
illuminated the alley.  On both sides windows were
broken and chilling winds echoed the emptiness of the
alley.  I walked out of the alley still held by two bright
spirits at each side of me.  When we came out onto the
main street, I could see neon signs announcing
gambling houses and bars.
      Suddenly a crowd of amorphous octopus-like
creatures gathered around us.  Looking like huge light
bulbs, they started to fall upon my feet.  Startled, I
picked one up and carefully studied it.  It had a human
form with a large head, two tiny eyes, a deformed nose
and a half opened mouth.  But its body was torn in
half and looked more like two legs than a body.  Tears
fell from its eyes.
      All of a sudden it bit my fingers and as a reflex
reaction, I shook it off of my hand and it bounced off
of the wall.
      The spirit on my right side said with a ringing
voice.  "This is the first heaven where criminals,
sinners and aborted babies reside.  The criminals and
sinners are here due to their own actions on earth.
However, aborted babies are here due to the criminal
acts of their parents.  The Lord JeungSan SangJeNim
has said, 'Since the beginning of history, the aborted
babies have carried the most dreadful vengeance and
now they turn into bullets and bombs to destroy the
world' (p.150).  Before they were conceived on earth,
they were someone else's ancestor spirits in heaven.
However, due to such criminal actions as abortions,
now they cannot even function as regular spirits in
heaven.  They all eventually commit suicides by
turning into bullets and bombs.  Some of them do
develop into a fuller spiritual self through the
charitable acts of their parents on earth.  When their
parents truly repent their criminal act of abortion and
adopt a child or sponsor a child on earth, the aborted
spirit fulfills its wishes on earth by living out its
denied life through that child."
      I looked around at the multitude of octopus-like
creatures.  The one that bit me could have been related
to me, I thought.
      I was jerked backwards by the bright spirits
holding my arms on both sides.  There was a prolonged
sensation of falling for a while; yet we were rising.  As
we went up further, more bright spirits gathered
around us and the world became brighter.  There were
numerous changes of scenery.  Finally we came upon a
massive white glass building.  By now a massive crowd
of bright spirits were gathered around us and we went
into the building.  At the front gate, it said 'The
United Federation of Heavenly Government'.  The
spirit holding my left arm spoke.  "We are finally at the
Ninth Heaven.  Today we shall attend a lecture given
by Mr. KyungJen Ahn - the Master Teacher of
JeungSan Do on earth.  He is the author of The Truth of
JeungSan Do, the book you are holding now."  Then I
realized that with my left hand I was holding my copy
of The Truth of JeungSan Do.

      We entered a large lecture hall.  There must
have been more than 12,000 spirits gathered there.  A
spirit dressed in a white robe with a Yim-Yang symbol
marking introduced the lecturer.  "Today we are
fortunate to have the leader of JeungSan Do from
earth - the Master Teacher, Mr. KyungJen Ahn.  As you
all know our Supreme Ruling Lord God, JeungSan
SangJeNim went down to earth on 1871 for thirty-nine
years.  Since then we spirits in heaven have been
obeying His order and preparing for the opening of the
Tenth Heaven on earth by restructuring our heavenly
order.  The Master Teacher of JeungSan Do, KyungJen
Ahn, even though he is still only a young man, has
been chosen by the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim to be the
leading worker on earth in constructing a new world.
He has come all the way from earth to our Ninth
Heaven to give us a lecture on relationship between the
spiritual world order and the world order on earth.
Let us welcome this Master Teacher from earth with
open arms."  The thundering applause rang my ears.
Dressed in a white suite, the Master Teacher walked up
to the lectern.
      I had imagined him to be over fifty years old
from reading his book, but he looked just over thirty.
From his eyes I could sense a strong determination and
will that I had not sensed in anyone else before.  His
voice thundered throughout the hall.

      The Master Teacher spoke, "Thank you for your
invitation today.  On earth JeungSan Do is gaining a
wide acceptance among college students.  You shall
soon be able to find many workers on earth that will
work with you in constructing the Coming Tenth
Heaven on Earth.  Today we will study together
JeungSan SangJeNim's teachings on the spiritual world.
I have been specifically requested to speak on this
topic by the Matteo Ricci priest.  I was told by him
that even you spirits do not fully know of the Lord
JeungSan's Plans for the spiritual world.  Please open
to page 108 of The Truth of JeungSan Do book."  Then I
noticed that every spirit in the hall was holding a copy
of The Truth of JeungSan Do.
      "Please read after me the passage on the page
108," said the Master Teacher.  The thundering voice of
12,000 spirits ringed my ears.  There was a bright silver
aura radiating from the Master Teacher and his aura
radiated into every spirit in the huge hall.  Following
is a summary of his lecture and the Sayings of the
Supreme Lord JeungSan SangJeNim that the Master
Teacher requested the spirits to memorize that day.

      *     "SongHwan Kim asked the JeungSan
      SangJeNim about the afterlife.  'Everyone has a
      spirit and a soul.  After death the spirit goes up
      to Heaven and becomes a being.  After
      receiving four generations of Memorial, it
      becomes either a deity or a god.  The soul
      returns to earth and after receiving four
      generations of Memorial, it becomes a ghost'"
      (p.108).

      "People often ask me whether there were spirits
before humans or vice versa.  As you all know, before
you were spirits you were humans on earth.  Every
spirit in Heaven has a tie with living humans on earth.
Without humans on earth, spirits in heaven would not
have any meaning.  And without humans on earth
remembering and paying respects (homage) to the good
deeds that the spirits before them have accomplished,
you could not be here today with me.  As the Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim has said, without the acts of
Memorials on earth the spirits in Heaven could not
develop and mature into deities or gods.  Yet tragically
today on earth many people deny the nature of heaven;
they even deprive of their own spirits dwelling within
themselves.  One's body on earth is its own temple for
the spirit dwelling within.  Thus if there were no
spirits in heaven, of course there cannot be any human
beings on earth.  And without human beings on earth,
the spirits in heaven will eventually fade away into an
empty void.  Human beings on earth are the ultimate
purpose of spirits in heaven.  Earth is a unique place
because there and only there the nature of this
universe can fully mature.  It is only there that the
inner body and the physical body of this universe can
fully bear fruit when the Cosmic Fall Time comes.  It
is crucial that people on earth and spirits in heaven
realize such an interdependence because we need each
other to survive and to prosper.
      "Today I lay out the functions and roles of
spirits on earth, but in order to do so we must first
understand the triple nature of human beings on earth.
Every human being on earth receives a body, a spirit
and a soul when it is born.  The spirit and soul
composes one's inner body.  The inner body is called an
'Astral Body' in modern science.  It is an entity that is
within the physical body.
      "A human receives Heavenly life and Earthly
energy when one is born on earth.  In combination of
the two fields, we create a soul, a spirit and a body.
An astral body is also called anti-matter in modern
science.  It is invisible in all possible measurements, yet
it has weight.  It  also occupies more space in this
universe than visible matters which means that there
are more of you spirits in this universe than humans on
earth.
      "The shape of an astral body is identical to the
physical body, and it changes as the physical form
changes.  An astral body is the entity that contains the
spirit and the soul.
      "During ordinary activities an astral body is in
synch with the physical body; but when a person is in
sleep or in meditation, the astral body slips out of the
physical body.  At this point the two bodies are
connected by the silver-colored life string.  This life
string comes out from the center of the eyebrows in
between the eyes.  And as you can see I am here today
in my astral body form.
      "This Astral body is known to have an aura.
The one who has a highly developed soul radiates in a
bright silver color.  The astral body not only interacts
with physical body but also is the source that radiates
and connects the workings of our environment.  A
highly attained soul freely interacts with the forces of
nature and sets the stage for the final outcome.

      *     "One day from His residence of Medicine
      Room watching the sun rise over the JeBi
      Mountain, Our JeungSan SangJeNim said, 'At
      this time of chaos, the one who has the vision of
      order must possess the power to stop the rising
      sun.  Now I shall test.'  And then He smoked
      three tobacco pipes in a row.  The sun stayed at
      the top of the mountain.  When He took out the
      ashes from His third pipe, suddenly the sun shot
      up to the mid-sky"  (p.114).

      *     "One day in June, 1909 KyungHak Kim
      came and spoke to the JeungSan SangJeNim of
      the difficulty the farmers were having due to
      the draught.  The JeungSan SangJeNim ordered
      GapChil Kim to bring a bucket of the purified
      water.  He gave a paper filled with letters to
      KyungHak and told Him, 'Wet it in the water
      and then rub the wet paper until it turns into
      powder.'  However, the rain did not come.  Thus
      the JeungSan SangJeNim told GapChil, 'I gave
      you the power to summon the rain god of the
      West to bring about rain.  Yet you disobeyed my
      order and did not devote your mind to this
      venture.  Now take off your clothes and pray
      forgiveness in front of the purified water.'
      When GapChil did as he was told, a dark cloud
      gathered from the Western Sky and big shower
      came pouring down.  Suddenly the river in
      front of the house overflew with rain."
            "KyungHak asked the JeungSan
      SangJeNim, 'Please stop the rain!  This shall be
      enough for the farmers.'  The Lord SangJeNim
      waved his fan once and the rain stopped.
      'Throw out the purified water and get dressed.'
      He told to all followers,  'If you purify your
      soul, you shall be able to achieve your will'"
      (p.117).

      "As one can see from above two examples if
one's spirit is in harmony with the law of heaven, not
only is one in full communion with the spirits, but also
is in full command of the law of heaven.  The Supreme
Ruling Lord in heaven Himself was born on earth to
illustrate such a point.

      *     "Spirits are the results of the law of
      Heaven"  (p.123).

      *     "Heaven and Earth are full of spirits.  A
      leaf dries when a spirit departs. An earthen
      wall collapses when a spirit leaves and a thorn
      enters underneath a finger-nail when a spirit
      enters"  (p.124).

      *     "SongHwan Kim asked the JeungSan
      SangJeNim about the Heavenly structure; 'Is
      there a Heaven above the Heaven?'  SangJeNim
      answered, 'Yes, there is a Heaven above the
      Heaven.'  SongHwan asked again, 'Is there
      another Heaven above that Heaven?'
      SangJeNim answered, 'Yes, there is another
      Heaven above.'  SangJeNim answered a total of
      nine times likewise, then told SongHwan that he
      needed not know more.  SangJeNim told him,
      'Pointless questions await only arguments'"
      (p.128).

      "As you all know currently our Heavenly
structure is constructed by layer of nine Heavens.
After a person dies his spirit ascends to the
appropriate Heaven according to his actions on earth.
      "The first and second level Heaven could be
classified as Hell.  The Heaven people living there are
result of their crimes.  They have disfigured faces and
bodies.  Their streets are dirty.  Their houses are run
down.  They have diseases, bullet-holes,  or weapon
wounds on their bodies.  A majority of them do not get
to live on to the Heavenly world.  They either commit
suicide by turning into bombs or bullets on earth or
they simply fade away like a smoke into emptiness.
      "The third and fourth level Heaven is where the
majority of people go when they die.  The third
Heaven is the idealized form of earth.  It is here that
people prepare to go up to the fourth level, or return to
earth as a human again.  On the fourth level a spiritual
record of all human history is kept.  The residents of
the fourth level become one with such a record.  They
are keepers of history.  At this point the spirits start to
go beyond the 'being' stage.
      "On the fifth level Heaven, the 'beings' form
psychic tribes.  Their saintly experiences on earth,
their wishes, their joy, their wisdom is shared.  They
all become one with the others.  Their mind becomes
one with the universe.  The line between subject and
object fades.
      "Beyond the sixth level is where gods and
deities reside.  The Heavenly people residing here have
a bright silver aurora.  The emotional aspect of man no
longer remains - only pure intellect rules this Heaven.
Jesus Christ and his followers reside on the sixth
Heaven, singing the song of eternity.
      "The ninth Heaven is where the JeungSan
SangJeNim resides and it is here that we are all
gathered today due to the JeungSan SangJeNim's plans
on earth.  Now all members of the Heavenly
government organized by the JeungSan SangJeNim and
those who were SangJeNim's followers on earth are
here today deciding on all Heavenly affairs and
charting all activities on earth to prepare for the
Coming Cosmic Fall Time.
      "When the Cosmic Fall Time comes, our earth
becomes the Highest Heaven - the Tenth Heaven.
People on earth shall be in total communion with the
spiritual world.  The Final Tenth Heaven does not
reside on top of the Ninth Heaven - it opens on earth.
During the Cosmic Summer Time the higher Heaven
opened above because the universe was expanding.
However, when the Cosmic Fall Time comes, the Final
Tenth Heaven opens on earth because in the Cosmic
Fall the universe stops its expansion.  Due to this
'Resting', the Axis of our universe shifts upright,
bringing about an equal Yim-Yang relationship in our
universe.  The spiritual Heavenly dimensions, which
have been separated from the physical dimensions on
earth through universal expansion, shall unite on
earth, the Tenth Heaven.  The earth now reside within
the realm of four dimensions.  The spiritual Heaven
now reside within the realm of other six dimensions
that have been separated from the earthly dimensions
when the universe started its expansion in the Cosmic
Spring Time.  When the Cosmic Fall Time comes the
separated dimensions come together and the ten
dimensional universe opens up on earth.  Dimensional
travel will become reality.  Spirits in Heaven shall be
able to ascend to the Tenth Heaven on earth in the
spiritual form to greet their descendants on earth.  The
Supreme Lord JeungSan SangJeNim with the TaeMo
Go SuBuNim shall also ascend to the Tenth Heaven on
earth in their radiating spiritual forms.
      "The Cosmic Fall Time shall last on earth for
50,000 years.  Then when the Cosmic Winter time
comes, the universe contracts momentarily.  The
earthly four dimensions shall be subdued during the
Ice Age on earth and humanity shall not be able to live
on earth.  During the Cosmic Winter time, the spiritual
Heaven prepares for another Cosmic Year.  When the
Cosmic Spring Time comes, the universe starts to
expand again and the spiritual Heavenly realm and the
physical earthly realm separates again.  A humanity
that is more mature than before springs forth on earth
receiving its wisdom from the previous experiences on
earth recorded in the spiritual Heaven.

      *     "People do not know the world of
      Heaven above Heaven.  People do not know the
      world beneath the earth.  People do not
      recognize the leader among men.  Where am I to
      go to speak of the Coming World?"  (p.130).

      *     "The souls and ghosts of the underworld
      came up to Heaven to transfer the way of the
      Heavenly world to the men on earth.  Since then
      the men on earth constructed a civilization
      according to the model of the Heaven"  (p.131).

      "The origin of universe is based on a wave.
Depending on the speed of the wave, there is a
difference in color, structure and energy.  Man's wave
frequency is faster than animals.  And those people
with higher spiritual state emit auroras with higher
frequency.

      *     "Those with a higher spiritual state shall
      live on to the Heavenly world.  Yet those with a
      decadent spiritual state shall have a decayed
      soul that shall fade away like a smoke after its
      physical death"  (p.136).

      *     "Life accompanies Death and death
      starts a new Life"  (p.137).

      "According to a recent study the moment when
a person dies, the person's weight is reduced by
twenty-one grams.  There is a life after death in the
spiritual world and a new life on earth means death in
the spiritual world.  You all had previous life
experiences on Earth.  It is harder and takes longer to
attain higher spirituality in Heaven because you are
void of physical body and often unmet physical needs
while living on earth still haunt spirits in Heaven.
Thus many spirits in heaven request to go down on
earth to try again for a higher self.  Yet once the spirit
is born on earth the impending physical needs
overwhelm spiritual desires.  Often the life-long quest
centers around fulfilling physical desires.  The Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim realized that first physical needs
must be met on earth before spiritual attainment was
possible.  Thus after His Attainment on earth on 1891,
the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim plotted the course of
human events until the Cosmic Fall Time such that all
humanity and all spirits in heaven can resolve their
unmet desires.  Even all spirits in Heaven are now
resolving their unmet earthly desires through similar
spiritual level people on earth.

      *     "Unfulfilled desires of the Humanity is
      the cause of all diseases"  (p.140).

      "The nature of humanity accompanies intellect
as well as emotions and desires.  Dreams and wishes
drive all forces in life.  When pure wishes turn into
desires, our desires apply our intellect in order to
achieve the necessary outcome to fulfill our desires.
However, when certain unforeseen outside forces deter
the path to fulfillment, our unfulfilled desires turn
into frustration, curse or anger.  Such a curse turns
into a rage and rage into revenge.  When the will to get
revenge solidifies, it destroys peace and tranquility.

      *     "One person's desire to destroy shall be
      enough to stop the progress of the civilization"
      (p.140).

      *     "During the Cosmic Summer Time 'The
      Law of Conflict' ruled the advancement of
      civilization.  Thus finally the will toward
      destruction overwhelmed humanity, causing
      much agony and disasters"  (p.141).

      "The JeungSan SangJeNim reminds us that
competition was the main driving force of our
civilization.  It invoked the adventurous spirits among
men.  It rewarded those with a vision and a will to
compete for that vision.  However, in the process, too
many had been put aside as victims.  And finally, the
curse of those with broken dreams are wishing for the
complete destruction of all cultures.  They brought on
World Wars.

      *     "The curse of wives of all culture are
      flooding up to the Ninth Heaven.  It is their
      intention to construct a new world of their
      own"  (p.150).

      *     "Since the beginning of human
      civilization, the curses of the aborted babies
      have been so great, they are turning into bullets
      and bombs to destroy the world"  (p.150).

      "Today people claim that unborn children can
be aborted at the will of its parents.  However, they
say this because they are unaware of the spiritual
world.  A conceived child receives its spirit and awaits
birth in its mother's womb.  However, when that will
to be born on earth is destroyed due to abortion, its
wishes and desires on earth turn into the most dreadful
curse for humanity.  An aborted spirit cannot even
function as a regular spirit in the spiritual world.  It
wanders the universe in its fetus form.  In the spiritual
world, before it was awarded with a life on earth, it
probably had to wait for many generations to receive a
life on earth.  It probably was someone else's ancestral
spirit in Heaven.  However, at one unfortunate
moment, its efforts to attain higher spirituality
through many stages of life on Earth and Heaven came
to an abrupt end due to an abortion.  Now it must
wander Heaven in unformed fetus form.  Most of the
aborted fetus spirits end up committing suicide in the
spiritual world because they cannot function properly.
Their suicides manifest as bombs and bullets in the
physical world.

      *     "When people fight on earth, the fight
      evokes fights among the ancestral spirits in
      Heaven.  Thus, when the fight among spirits
      cease, there shall be an end to war on earth"
      (p.150).

      "When people fight on earth, anger and death
cause fights in Heaven among guardian and ancestral
spirits of these people on Earth.  Thus it is important
to end fighting among spirits in Heaven before solving
problems on earth.  The Lord of Heaven and Earth
Himself came to earth and was born as a human child
in order to stop the fighting among spirits.  And as a
Human, the Supreme Spirit of Lord JeungSan
SangJeNim reconstructed the Heavenly order; thus
fighting in the Heavenly world can be resolved.
      "Before the Cosmic Fall Time comes, all
conflicts in Heaven shall be resolved by fulfilling
unmet physical desires of spirits in Heaven.  Those
spirits that had unresolved greedy and sinful desires
on earth can now fulfill their desires through people
with similar desires on earth.  Once their evil
intentions are met, they shall fade away into an empty
void when the Cosmic Fall Time comes.  This Time
when the Cosmic Fall Time comes 'Death' on earth
does not mean rebirth in the spiritual world.  This time
your descendants on earth must bear fruits; otherwise
those spirits in Heaven who are the ancestors of the
descendants shall fade away along with their
descendants when the Cosmic Fall Time comes.  You
must choose which one among your numerous
descendants is capable of fully maturing before the
Cosmic Fall Time comes and rely on him or her to
deliver you to the Tenth Heaven on earth by lending
them full support in the United Federation of the
Heavenly Government in the Ninth Heaven.  Of course
this does not mean that all those spirits without
descendants on earth to depend on shall fade away
when the Cosmic Fall Time comes.  You can be
delivered by assisting those on earth who seem to have
potential of fully maturing before the Cosmic Fall
Time comes.
      "When the Cosmic Fall Time comes all Deaths
shall be by choice.  One's desires on earth shall
determines one's final outcome.  If a person's wish is
one of destruction, then all the spirits in heaven with
similar desires will help that person to achieve such a
wish.  If a person's wish is to achieve peace on earth,
then all those spirits in heaven with similar wishes
shall help that person to achieve such a wish.  When the
Cosmic Fall Time comes, those people on earth who
have wished for what the Cosmic Fall Time on earth
means, shall live in it; and those who had wished for
something else would have already met their wishes on
earth before the Cosmic Fall Time comes.
      "When the Cosmic Fall Time comes, the ten
dimensional universe opens up on earth.  Such a
sudden opening of the spiritual realm means people's
inner bodies shall slip out from their physical bodies.
Once the inner body is disconnected from the physical
body the physical body dies.  Those who had wished
for the Cosmic Fall Time and prepared for it through
TaeUlJu Chanting Meditation shall be allowed to
return to their physical bodies.  Others shall not find a
way to return.  Once the inner bodies of these people
enter the spiritual realm, the spirit soldiers designated
by the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim shall cut off the
Astral-string that connects their physical body with
the inner body; and they shall fade away into an
empty void like a smoke, along with those ancestral
and guiding spirits that were fulfilling their unmet
desires on earth through such people.  When the Cosmic
Fall Time comes, the JeungSan Do workers on earth
shall be in full communion with the spirit soldiers.  It
is the JeungSan Do workers on earth who shall revive
people from this out of body journey by leaving signs
for the spirit soldiers.  Those with proper 'Markings' on
their forehead shall not have their Astral-string
severed by the spirit soldiers.  Then using proper
'Medicine' the JeungSan Do workers shall revive those
people who are of 'bright aura'.  What this 'Marking'
and 'Medicine' are, only the Lord JeungSan
SangJeNim, the General of the Spirit Soldier and the
Supreme Teacher of JeungSan Do know until the
proper time.
      "Finally I would like to end today's lecture by
chanting the TaeUlJu Chant together twenty-one times.
I have been told by the Supreme Teacher of JeungSan
Do that the TaeUlJu Chant constitutes an important
part of the revival 'Medicine' from the 'Cosmic Fall
Time Death'.  You can be sure that those who chant
TaeUlJu on earth will deliver you to the Cosmic Fall
Time."  The thundering sound of 12,000 spirits
chanting TaeUlJu together simply overwhelmed me.
Then I remembered my own TaeUlJu meditation on
earth.
      Suddenly I was thrown up by the spirits that
were holding my arms.  I felt my legs had terrible
cramps.  I opened my eyes and I was in my room
chanting TaeUlJu.
Chapter 11  Ten-dimentional Super String Theory


      The Master Teacher's lecture reminded me of a
new scientific development of the ten-dimensional
Superstring theory that Princeton physicist Edward
Witten claimed as the true unification theory of the
physics.  The Superstring theory was unique because it
not only provided a unified explanation for all
physical activities but it also implied existence of a
spiritual world.  The mathematics of the Superstring
theory implied a ten-dimensional universe which
meant there were six other dimensions that were
beyond our normal sensory experiences.  My spiritual
experience and the Master Teacher's lecture on the
spiritual world affirmed for me that our universe was
indeed ten dimensional.

      Following is a summary of the Superstring
theory according to my physics notes.

            Outline for Superstring theory:

      1.  What Relativity and Quantum theory says.
      2.  What Superstring theory says.
      3.  What JeungSan Do says.

      Princeton physicist Edward Witten has boldly
claimed that the Superstring theory will dominate the
world of physics of the next fifty years.  "Superstring
theory is a miracle, through and through. . . .  It is
probably going to lead to a new understanding of what
space and time are, the most dramatic since general
relativity."
      Physicists say they are particularly excited
about the superstring theory because it forces them to
revise their understanding of the nature of matter.
Since the time of the Greeks, scientists have assumed
that the ultimate building blocks of the universe were
tiny point particles.  Democritus coined the word atom
to describe these ultimate, indestructible units of
matter.
      The superstring theory, however, assumes that
the ultimate building blocks of nature consists of tiny
vibrating strings.  If correct, this means that the
protons and neutrons in all matter, everything from
our bodies to the farthest star, is ultimately made up of
strings.  Nobody has ever seen these strings because
they are much too small to be observed (they are about
100 billion billion times smaller than a proton).
According to the superstring theory, our world only
appears to be made of point particles, because our
measuring devices are too crude to see these tiny
strings.
      Knowing the physics of a violin string,
therefore, gives us a comprehensive theory of musical
tones and allow us to predict entirely new harmonies
and chords.  Similarly, in the superstring theory, the
fundamental forces and various particles found in
nature are nothing but different modes of vibrations
of strings.  The gravitational interaction, for example,
is caused by the lowest vibratory mode of a circular
string - a loop.  Higher excitations of the string create
different forms of matter.  From the point of view of
the superstring theory, no force or particle is more
fundamental than any other.  They are just different
vibratory resonances of vibrating strings.  Thus, a
single framework - the superstring theory - can in
principle explain why the universe is populated with
such a rich diversity of particles and atoms.
      The answer to the ancient question, "What is
matter?" is simply that matter consists of particles that
are just different modes of vibration of the string,
such as the note G or F.  The "music" created by the
Superstring is matter itself.
      But the fundamental reason why the world's
physicists are so excited by this new theory is that it
appears to solve perhaps the most important scientific
problem of the century: namely, how to unite the four
forces of nature into one comprehensive theory.  At the
center of this upheaval is the realization that the four
fundamental forces governing our universes are
actually different manifestations of a single unifying
force, governed by the superstring.

1.  What Relativity and Quantum theory says.

      The four fundamental forces.

      1) Gravity

      Gravity is an attractive force that binds
together the solar system, keeps the earth and the
planets in their orbits, and prevents the stars from
exploding.  In our universe, gravity is the dominant
force that extends trillions upon trillions of miles, out
to the farthest stars; this force, which causes an apple
to fall to the ground and which keeps out feet
anchored to the floor, is the same force that silently
guides the galaxies in their motions throughout the
universe.

      2) Electromagnetic force

      The electromagnetic force holds together the
atom.  It makes the electrons (with negative charge)
orbit around the positively charged nucleus of the
atom.  Because the electromagnetic force determines
the structure of the orbits of the electrons, it also
governs the laws of chemistry.
      On the earth, the electromagnetic force is often
strong enough to overpower gravity.  By rubbing a
comb, for example, it is possible to pick scraps of paper
from a table.  The electromagnetic force thus
counteracts the downward force of gravity and
dominates over the other forces down to
0.0000000000001 inch (roughly the size of a nucleus).
      Perhaps the most familiar form of the
electromagnetic force is light.  When the atom is
disturbed, the motion of the electrons around the
nucleus becomes irregular and they emit light and
other forms of radiation, in the form of X-rays, radar,
microwave, or light.  Radio and television, two
indispensable parts of our lives, are simply different
forms of the electromagnetic force.  Within the nucleus
of the atom, the electromagnetic force is overpowered
by the weak and strong (nuclear) forces.

      3) Strong force

      The strong force, for example, is responsible for
binding together the protons and neutrons in the
nucleus.  In any nucleus, all the protons are positively
charged.  Left to themselves, their repulsive electric
force would tear apart the nucleus.  The strong force,
therefore, overcomes the repulsive force between the
protons and binds them together.  Roughly speaking,
only a few elements can maintain the delicate balance
between the strong force (which tends to hold the
nucleus together) and the repulsive electric force
(which tends to rip apart the nucleus), which helps to
explain why there are only about one hundred known
elements in nature.  Beyond one hundred protons in the
nucleus, even the strong nuclear force has difficulty
containing the repulsive electric force between these
protons.
      When the strong nuclear force is suddenly
unleased, the effect can be catastrophic.  For example,
when the uranium nucleus in an atomic bomb is
deliberately split, the enormous energies locked within
the nucleus are released explosively in the form of a
nuclear detonation.  Pound for pound, a nuclear bomb
releases over a million times the energy contained in
dynamite.  This vividly demonstrates the fact that the
strong force can yield significantly more energy than a
chemical explosive, which is governed by the
electromagnetic force.
      The strong force also explains the reason why
stars shine.  A star is basically a huge nuclear furnace
in which the strong force within the nucleus is
unleashed.  If the sun's energy, for example, were
created by burning coal instead of nuclear fuel, only a
minuscule fraction of the sun's light would be
produced.  The sun would rapidly fizzle and turn into
a cinder.  Without sunlight, the earth would turn cold
and all life on it would eventually die.  Without the
strong force, therefore, the stars would not shine, there
would be no sun, and life on earth would be
impossible.
      If the strong force were the only force at work
inside the nucleus, then most nuclei would be stable.
However, we know from experience that certain nuclei
(such as uranium, with ninety-two protons) are so
massive that they automatically break apart, releasing
smaller fragments and debris, which we call
radioactivity.  Quite simply, in these elements the
nucleus is unstable and disintegrates.  Therefore, yet
another, weaker force must be at work, one that
governs radioactivity and is responsible for the
disintegration of very heavy nuclei.  This is the weak
force.

      4) Weak force

      The weak force is so fleeting and ephemeral
that we do not experience it directly in our lives.
However, we feel its indirect effects.  When a
Geigercounter is placed next to a piece of uranium, for
example, the clicks that one hears measure the
radioactivity of the nuclei, which is caused by the
weak force.  The energy released by the weak force
can also be used to create heat.  For example, the
intense heat found in the interior of the earth is
partially caused by the decay of radioactive elements
deep in the earth's core.  This tremendous heat, in turn,
can erupt in volcanic fury if it reaches the earth's
surface.  Similarly, the heat released by the core of a
nuclear power plant, which can generate enough
electricity to light up a city, is also caused by the weak
force (as well as the strong force).

      Einstein's General Relativity theory explains
gravity - the physics of the very large scale.  It
explains the cosmic scale of galaxies, the black hole
and the Big Bang that had sent the galaxies hurtling
away from one another at enormous speeds at the
beginning of our known universe.  But his theory
cannot explain the behavior of atoms and molecules.
      Quantum Mechanics, on the other hand,
explains the three subatomic forces.  It explains the
workings of the World of Small.  It unravels the secrets
of nuclear physics.  It unleashes the power of the
hydrogen bomb.  It explains the workings of
everything from transistors to lasers.  In fact, the
theory is so powerful, if we had enough time, we could
predict all the properties of the chemical elements by
computer.  But this theory does not explain gravity.
This is why the scientists are so thrilled about the
Superstring theory.  It explains the workings of the
very large to the very small.  It explains both gravity
and subatomic forces.
      According to Einstein's theory, the universe was
born about ten to twenty billion years ago in a gigantic
explosion called the Big Bang.  Theologians as well as
scientists have for years realized the incompleteness of
the Big Bang theory, because it fails to explain the
origin and nature of the Big Bang itself.  Incredibly,
the superstring theory predicts what happened before
the Big Bang.

2.  What Superstring theory says.

      According to the superstring theory, the
universe originally existed in ten dimensions, not the
four dimensions (three space dimensions and one time
dimension) of today.  However, because the universe
was unstable in ten dimensions, it "cracked" into two
pieces, with a small, four-dimensional universe peeling
off from the rest of the universe.  By analogy, imagine
a soap bubble that is vibrating slowly.  If the
vibrations become strong enough, the soap bubble
becomes unstable and fissions into two or more smaller
soap bubbles.  Imagine that the original soap bubble
represents the ten-dimensional universe, and that one
of the smaller soap bubbles represents our present day
universe.
      If this theory is true, it means that our universe
actually has a "sister universe" that co-exists with our
universe.  It also means that the original fissioning of
our universe was so violent that it created the
explosion we refer to as the Big Bang.  The superstring
theory, therefore, explains the Big Bang as a byproduct
of a much more violent transition, the cracking of the
ten-dimensional universe into two pieces.
      One need not have to worry, however, that one
day as one is walking down the street one will
suddenly "fall" into another other-dimensional universe
as though in a science fiction novel.  According to the
superstring theory, the other multidimensional
universe has shrunk to such an incredibly small size
(about 100 billion billion times smaller than the
nucleus of an atom) that it can never be reached by
humans.  Thus, it becomes an academic question what
higher dimensions look like.  In this sense, the prospect
of traveling between higher dimensions was possible
only at the origin of the universe, when the universe
was ten-dimensional and interdimensional travel was
physically possible.

      Dark matter has been predicted in the past, but
wherever scientists trained their telescopes and
instruments in the heavens, they found only the
hundred or so familiar chemical elements existing on
the earth.  Even stars in the farthest reaches of the
universe are made of ordinary hydrogen, helium,
oxygen, carbon, and other elements.  On one hand, this
was reassuring, knowing that wherever we traveled in
outer space, our rocket ships would encounter only the
chemical elements found on the earth.  The superstring
theory might possibly change all that.

      The process of fissioning from a
ten-dimensional universe down to smaller universes
will likely create a new form of matter.  This matter
has weight, like all matter, but is totally invisible
(hence the name).  Dark matter is also tasteless and has
no smell.  Even our most sensitive instruments cannot
detect its presence.  If you could hold this dark matter
in your hand, it would certainly feel heavy, but it
would otherwise be invisible and undetectable.  In
fact, the only way to detect this dark matter is by its
weight; it has no other known form of interaction with
other forms of matter.

      Dark matter may also help to explain one of the
puzzles of cosmology.  If there is sufficient matter in
the universe, then the gravitational attraction of the
galaxies should slow down the expansion and even
possibly reverse it, causing the universe to collapse.
However, there is conflicting data as to whether there
is enough matter in the universe to cause this reversal
and eventual collapse.  Astronomers who have tried to
calculate the total amount of matter in the visible
universe find that there is simply not enough matter in
stars and galaxies to cause the universe to collapse.
However, other calculations (based on calculating the
red shifts and luminosities of stars) indicate that the
universe might collapse.  This is called the "missing
mass" problem.

      If the superstring theory is correct, then dark
matter may explain why astronomers fail to see this
form of matter in their telescopes and instruments.  If
this theory of dark matter is correct, there may be
dark matter pervading the entire universe.  (Indeed,
there may be more dark matter than ordinary matter).
In this regard, the superstring theory not only clarifies
what happened before the Big Bang but predicts what
may happen at the death of the universe.

3.  What JeungSan Do says.

      The Superstring theory made much sense to me
now that I knew of the spiritual world.  The world of
physics was finally coming up with a mathematical
model for the spiritual world.  In The Truth of
JeungSan Do book there was an interesting concept laid
out by the Master Teacher.  It went further than the
Superstring theory in dimensional concepts and
explained the workings of the other six dimensions and
how they interacted with our four dimensional world.

      According to JeungSan Do our universe expands
and contracts within the cycle of 129,600 years causing
a cosmic scale spring, summer, fall and winter.  Yet so
far the expansion of the universe was greater than the
contraction.  This means beside the original Big Bang,
there had been numerous smaller Big Bangs.  These
events JeungSan Do calls GaeByuk.  Also, this means
that temporary contraction does not mean the death of
universe - it means a temporary resting period (Cosmic
Winter).  These contractions cannot be detected with
our instruments because they are within the realm of
other six dimensions.  JeungSan Do predicts that a ten-
dimensional universe shall open up on earth when the
Cosmic Fall Time comes.  JeungSan Do also spells out
how this occurs by showing that there are all together
ten forces that govern our universe rather than known
four fundamental forces.
      According to JeungSan Do in addition to known
four forces, there is a fifth Neutral force that acts as
an intermediating force.  This Neutral force, in
combination with the four fundamental forces,
generates opposite-gravity, opposite-electromagnetic
force, opposite-strong force and opposite-weak force.
These opposite-forces govern the spiritual world.
U.F.O.'s which seem to defy gravity can be said to be
utilizing the opposite-gravity force.  The gravity with
opposite-gravity explains the expansion and
contraction of our universe.  The fifth Neutral force
in combination with itself generates the tenth opposite-
neutral force.  The neutral force, combined with the
opposite-neutral force, explains the shifting of earth's
axis.  And within the mathematics of the Superstring
theory, if all ten forces are accounted as variables,
then one should be able to predict the behavior of the
axis shifting.
      After thinking about JeungSan Do's claim on
opposite forces, I thought about the Superstring theory.
The Superstring theory stated not only ourselves made
up of invisible tiny strings; but also our universe was
connected by invisible strings.  If there was one force
that was pulling the string at the one end, then I
guessed it was only natural that there was an opposite
force that was pulling the same string at the other end.
I thought to myself that the forces that manifested and
deleted these strings could be the two neutral forces.
      The claims of JeungSan Do made much sense to
me within the context of the Superstring theory.  I had
thought that if we could only identify this fifth
Neutral force, then all other opposite forces should fall
into place.
Chapter 12  Trip to Washington


      After the spiritual trip to the Ninth Heaven I
was determined to find out more about JeungSan Do.
Even under scientific assumptions, the world claimed
by JeungSan Do was definitely within my reach.
Often I felt proud that I might hold the key to a new
understanding of our universe.  And within this vast
context, I slowly began to grasp a sense of who I was
and what I must do here in the U.S.  I strongly felt
there were people in America waiting to meet me.
Sometimes the need to understand my place in the U.S.
overwhelmed me.  I knew there was work to be done by
me in America.  I had to find out.
      Shortly after I graduated I started working for
a local department store in New York.  There, people
from all over the world came to buy merchandise.  The
JeungSan SangJeNim had said that new material
wealth was a gift from heaven.  He had said they were
to help humanity in furthering human achievement.
When people purchased a product, they did more than
simply buy a needed product; they bought material
projections of their wishes and desires.  They were
fulfilling their unresolved lifelong and ancestral
desires.  Yet among the mountains of products, there
was not a single product that satisfied my desire to
find the truth.  I felt it was waiting for me out there in
this vast land of America.  After about three months
after I began working, I asked for a long vacation and
ventured a journey to find out what it meant to be
'Kan' in America.

      I hopped on a Greyhound bus in New York and
started for Washington.  I had been in the U.S. for over
ten years but I had not yet seen Washington.  I was
excited.  I needed not know what waited for me out on
the road.  I only needed to know that something out
there requested my presence.  And I was certain there
were people waiting for me to come to tell them of the
JeungSan SangJeNim's Words.
      Once I was out of the city the road opened up.
There were not many people on the bus; those who
were looked worn out.  There was one woman wearing
a blank expression on her face, sitting across from me
and holding a baby. Why and to where was she
travelling?  Another tragedy unfolding from a
shattered home due to a divorce?  The baby looked
peaceful enough in its sleep, unaware of the journey it
must embark in its lifetime.
      Americans are always on the move, I thought.
Uprooted, they seek their origins that they once
abandoned or were forced to abandon.  Black teenagers
were singing the latest pop music in the back seat.
      Behind my seat an old man sat peacefully, a
pensive look crinkling up his face as if it were a
malleable hand puppet.  His hands rested atop his cane
standing in front of him.  For some, the ease of motion
slowly withers away, but the journey still continues.
      We came to a stop in a small town.  As the bus
stopped to pick up more passengers, I spotted a mobile
home village on the outskirts of the town.  Houses on
wheels!  People on the move.  There are no more
frontiers left; yet, the wide open prairies await them.
If it weren't for barbed wire, would they still be
roaming?  Roaming to find what?  Is there a pot of
gold waiting for them at the end of the journey?  Gold
diggers - that's who they are, I thought.  Imagine
having gold in the atmosphere, inhaling the glittering
dust and never letting it out.  Is there truth in
gold-dust?  We passed two more small towns that
looked exactly like the others with the ubiquitous
Golden-Arches on the main street.  People walked
around, smelling the gold dust falling from the
Golden-Arches.  Lovers holding hands drove by our
bus in their long cars.  Cars in America do not run on
gas.  They run on passion; passion for the glitter of
gold.
      By the time I got to Washington the sun was
setting.  The outskirts of the town was glowing with
golden dusk. The bus pulled into its station.  Massive
buildings surrounded me.  I went to a cafeteria and
grabbed a bite to eat.  I walked around the bus station
but I could not find a cheap motel.  The outside was
getting dark.  Under the setting sun, Washington
looked like a huge monument, seeming like a
prominent headstone.  Massive stone buildings were
scattered around.  On the horizon I could see an
especially tall tower piercing the sunset.  I walked
around the streets trying to find a place to spend the
night.
       Once the night came the town became quiet.  I
could see a line of people walking in one direction.  I
walked up to them.  They were four or five black men
with shoulder bags.  It looked as if they were walking
home from work.  I asked them if they knew of a
cheap motel where I could spend a night.  They raised
their eyebrows, watching me oddly, and motioned me
to follow them.  Forming a line, I marched with them.
All of a sudden the magnificent stone architectural
monuments disappeared from my sight.  Passing a
couple of run-down low-rise buildings, I spotted a
foggy light shining from a building that reminded me
of my old school building in Korea.  I saw many people
entering the building.  Our group marched into the
building as if it were their home.  I hesitated a while
in front of the building, not having a clue to where I
was.  It was getting a little chilly outside, so I ventured
in.
      A huge black man was sitting behind a desk in
front of a staircase, reading a magazine.  He looked up
when I stepped in and ran his eyes over me. Quickly,
he blurted out, "Second floor," and returned to his
magazine.   Receiving his unquestionable order, I
walked up the stairs.  There were many doors; there
was one open door to my right so I coyly walked in.  It
was an endless open room with bunk beds lined up in
sixteen rows.  I thought, "So this is the shelter for the
homeless!"  I found an empty bed near the door.  I put
down my sack on the bed and took my shoes off. The
man sitting on the bed next to me looked at me quietly
for a while and then told me to keep my shoes on the
bed or otherwise they might be stolen overnight.  I
smiled at him appreciatively and hid the shoes under
the blanket near my feet.  I could hear people snoring
loudly.  I spent my first night in the Nation's Capital
at its shelter.  I complemented its hospitality to the
city's mayor.
      At the crack of the dawn, we were driven out
from the shelter into the street.  With shoulder bags
hanging on their shoulders the unanimously black
crowd marched into the Nation's capital.  I followed
them timidly.  Some of them went into dinners for
breakfast.  Some of them wandered around the streets.
Some of them went into grocery stores to get some
food.
      After getting some breakfast I wandered
around until I arrived at the Smithsonian Museum.
Inside the building I encountered the culture of the
native American Indians.  The way the Indians used to
live was pictorially depicted there.  It looked familiar
in more than one way.  It almost made me feel as if I
were in a farm village in Korea.
      I found the traditional Korean straw shoes
there; the sign said that the shoes were discovered
around Arizona and they were proven to be about 9000
years old according to the carbon test.  The favorite
Korean game of Yut, a game in which one throws four
sticks to determine the moves of pawns was depicted
there by the Indian dolls.  The sign said it was the
popular game among all Indians of North America.  On
the wall it said that American Indians came to
America from Central Asia around 12000 to 6000 years
ago by crossing the Bering Straight, covered with ice at
that time.  Then I remembered the traditional Korean
history told by the Master Teacher KyungJeon Ahn in
his book The Truth of JeungSan Do.

      According to the Master Teacher Ahn, Koreans
held in our possession nine thousand years of history
since our Great Ancestor AnPaGyun (meaning
heavenly chief father) HwanIn (meaning the attained
one) gained the knowledge of the Truth of the Divine
Trinity.  Nine thousand years of Korean history since
AnPaGyun HwanIn was recorded in the book call the
'Hwan Dan Go Ki'.  During the Japanese occupation of
Korea, this book was burned when every book at the
palace library was burned by the Japanese in their
attempt to shorten Korean history.  The Japanese, in
their attempt to give a justifiable reason for Korean
occupation, fabricated Korean history into three
thousand years of colonial history.  The Japanese
changed Korean history such that from the very
beginning, Korea was founded by Japanese as a colony
of Japan three thousand years ago.  This they claimed
and taught in all schools in Korea for over forty years,
despite the fact that in their own legend it says that
Japan was founded by a heavenly princess that came
over to Japan across the sea.
      It is a well known historical fact that the
princess was an ousted Queen of Shilla (a Korean
nation 3500 years ago).  Yet the distorted version of
Korean history was propagated to the world by the
Japanese and in American High School I had to learn
of Korean history in that distorted form.  During
1980's the 'Hwan Dan Go Ki' book resurfaced in
village towns of Korea and in China.  Also in Soviet
Union, numerous books on Korean history that dates
back to six thousand years ago have been published by
the Far-East institute.

      *     The JeungSan SangJeNim said following
      words regarding Korean history, "I worry that
      the ancestors of Korean people - HwanIn,
      HwanWoong and DanGun - are losing their
      places in the minds of their descendants.
      Beware of those who deny their own ancestral
      roots.  Please listen to me and respect your
      ancestors.  HwanIn, HwanWoong and DanGun
      are your roots"  (p.224).

      Following is a summary of nine thousand years
of Korean history according to The Truth of JeungSan
Do book.
      Our current Humanity of Homo Sapiens Sapiens
was born on earth 50,000 years ago. The first known
humanity of 3,700,000 years ago of Homo Habilis or
Homo Erectus of 1,500,000 years ago are the people of
previous civilization - previous Cosmic Years.
      According to modern science the Homo Sapiens
Sapiens mysteriously appeared on earth about 40,000
years ago - at the start of this year's Cosmic Spring
Time.  The previous generation of Neanderthalers
became extinct about 70,000 years ago - at last year's
Cosmic Winter Time.  There does not appear to be a
gradual evolutionary change between them.  That is
because Homo Sapiens Sapiens were brought forth into
existence during this year's Cosmic Spring Time.  The
Neanderthalers were of last Cosmic year's people.
      About 12,000 years ago there was a sudden
change in earth's axis when the Cosmic Summer time
started.  Due to this change, the southern civilization
of Atlantis and Mu disappeared into the sea.  Then,
about 9000 years ago our current civilization prepared
its birth at the Tien Shan mountain.
      The Tien Shan mountain was the center of all
old civilizations.  The mountain, by its location,
divided the ancient four civilizations.  To its
Northeast, there was Mongolia.  To its East, there was
China.  To its South, there was India.  To its West,
there was Mesopotamia.  The Mesopotamian
civilization gave birth to Christianity and Islam.  The
Indian civilization gave birth to Buddhism and Hindu.
The Chinese civilization gave birth to Confucianism
and Taoism.
      About 9000 years ago, our Great Ancestral
Father AnPaGyun HwanIn was awakened to the Truth
of the Divine Trinity.  He was selected by the people as
their Great Ancestral Father.  He opened the first
civilization at the TienShan Mountain and ruled the
neighboring people by dividing them into twelve
nations.  Following is the list of the twelve nations:  1)
Bi-Ry-Guk(nation)  2) Yang-Un-Guk(nation)  3) Gu-
Mak-Han-Guk(nation)  4) Gu-Da-Chun-Guk  5) Il-Gun-
Guk  6) Ur-Guk  7) Gaek-Hyun-Han-Guk  8) Gu-Mo-
Al-Guk  9) Mae-Gu-Yo-Guk  10) Sa-Nap-A-Guk  11)
Sun-Bi-Guk  12) Su-Meri-Guk.  There were total of
seven HwanIns (HwanIn is the title); AnPaGyun,
HyukSe, GoSiLi, JuWooYang, SukJeIm, GuWooLi,
JiWiLi.  Their ruling lasted for over 3000 years.
      The civilization of 9000 years ago started at
high mountain tops because at that time the plains
were often flooded - it was during the Cosmic Rain
Season.  Then about 6000 years ago, the plains started
to dry up and the last HwanIn - JiWiLi HwanIn - saw
that there were many people living in the plains.  Yet
they were ignorant of the Truth of the Divine Trinity.
Thus one day he called in the head of all twelve
nations and instructed them to go down the mountains
and teach the Truth of Trinity.  He gave each one of
them a seal to mark them as his messenger to the
people.  And he gave them following instructions,
'Lead onto Brightness', 'Provide with Love' and
'Benefit humanity'.  Receiving his 'Words', the twelve
nations dispersed into twelve directions to Manchuria,
Siberia, America, China, India, Mesopotamia, Norway
and Africa.
      The two nations called Sumer-Guk(nation) and
Ur-Guk(nation), which lived on the western side of the
TienShan Mountain, moved into Mesopotamia.  They
settled near the Euphrates river and built Sumer and
Ur nations.  With them they carried the Divine Truth
of Trinity.  And their first God was called 'An' -
meaning the Heavenly Father.  They built high mounds
and placed their ancestral Sky God 'An' at the top in
order to remember their heritage and history.  They
had black hair and they called themselves 'the people
from the eastern mountain'.  Their language belonged
to the Ural Altai group, the same as Mongolians and
Korean.  They also carried with them the first known
writing system similar to the ancient Chinese writing
system. According to the renowned Sumer
anthropologist, Dr. Kramer, Sumerians had achieved
high civilization with their own writing systems,
schools and governments and their concept of gods laid
foundation to Judaism and Christianity.
      5884 years ago, the direct descendent of
AnPaGyun HwanIn, the BaeDal
HwanWoongChunWang (meaning the Holy Bright King
of Heaven), came to Manchuria and constructed the
BaeDal nation.  There were eighteen HwanWoongs
(HwanWoong is the title); BaeDal, GuBaLi, WooYaGo,
MoSaRa, TaeWooYi, DaYiBal, GuoYeon, AnBuYeon,
YangWoon, GalGo, GuoYaBal, JuMuSin, SaWaRa,
JaOhJi, ChiAet, ChukDaRi, HyukDaSe, GueBulDan.
The second HwanWoong - GuBaLi HwanWoong -
ordered to gather and organize writing systems.  From
the prevalent writing systems that were used at the
time to mark the 'Words' of HwanIn, the original forms
of Korean alphabets and Chinese characters were
developed.  Today even the Chinese admit their
writing system (the Chinese Characters) originated
from the nation of Eun, one of the known ancient
Korean nations.  The BaeDal nation lasted for 1565
years.  At B.C. 2333 DanGun - a direct Ancestor of the
Korean people and the direct descendent of
HwanWoong -  married the daughter of the Bear Clan
Chief living in north of Korean peninsula and
founded the 'Chosen' Nation in Manchuria and Chosen
ruled Asia for 2096 years.  There were forty-seven
DanGuns (DanGun is the title); 1) DanGunWangGum,
2) BuRu, 3) GaRuk, 4) OhSaGu, 5) GuUl, 6) DalMoon,
7) HanYul, 8) SeHan, 9) AhSul, 10) NoYul, 11) DoHae,
12) Ahan, 13) HolDal, 14) GoBul, 15) DaeYym 16)
WyNa, 17) YuWool, 18) DongUm.  19) JongYeon, 20)
GoHul, 21) SoTae, 22) SaekBulRu, 23) Ahul, 24)
YunNa, 25) SolNa, 26) ChooRo, 27)DuMil, 28) HaeMo,
29) MaHu, 30) NaeHu, 31) DungHang, 32) ChuMil, 33)
GamMul, 34) OhMunRu, 35) SaBel, 36) MaeRuk, 37)
MaMul, 38) DaMul, 39) DuHol, 40) DalYum, 41)
YumCha, 42) YulWooJi, 43) MulRi, 44) GuMul, 45)
YuRu, 46) BoWul, 47) GoYulGa.
      After seeing the American Indian exhibits in
Smithsonian, I wanted to see how the Indians lived.  I
thought that by seeing their lives, rituals and customs I
could understand the nine thousand years of Korean
history much better.  It was possible that the remnants
of the teachings of HwanIn were still preserved among
American Indians.  After all, Koreans call our father
'apa' and among American Indians 'Apache' means the
Great Chief Father; and it was possible that the names
came directly from AnPaGyun.  And even if some
American Indians were not direct descendants of
AnPaGyun, it was possible that secrets of human
history were preserved among them.  It was very
possible that some American Indians came over from
the Mu continent that had submerged into the pacific
when the Cosmic Summer Time came.  It was possible
that they had the critical knowledge to understanding
the Cosmic Cycle of Time.Chapter 13  The Hopis and the Secret of the Cosmic
Cycle of Time


      I took a plane to Phoenix and then by bus I
arrived at Flagstaff late at night.  The air smelled
crisp and clear.  I rented a station wagon and checked
into a nearby motel.  Early next morning, I started
heading to Mesa where the ruins of Anasazi - the
ancient one - and Hopi Indians lived.
      The bare earth proudly displayed itself as it
stretched in all directions.  A thick red hue stretched
out into the horizon.  The ancient center of all
ethnicity unearthed itself.  The earth smelled draft
and thick.  Passing small pine forests, bare mounds of
cactus mountains came into view.  The mountains
formed a dark mouth about to engulf life after death.
The smooth, molten earth echoed new life as well as
regeneration of the deceased.  As bizarre as the concept
sounded, I thought  "This is the earth's home!"  The
road extended to the east and the dawning sun slid
down the long stretch.  The thick undulating oasis of
an inviting yet imaginary pond lay just ahead on the
road as if to tease my thirst for truth.
      I drove all morning into the sun.  Although my
lips were parched, I felt I was quenching my thirst for
truth.   The road now headed up a hill.  A sudden
intrusion of rocky red mountains pierced an otherwise
monotonous horizon.  I postulated there must be stories
and legends behind every one of those mountains,
denied of its own place, on the minds of deprived new
owners of this vast land.  The road sign told me that I
was now entering Indian reservation.
      By now the sun was beaming straight down on
me from above.  The road stretched upward into the
sun.  Then suddenly a vast expanse of plateau above
the flat plane of Arizona opened up.  The blue sky of
Autumn blended into the red horizon that suddenly
fell down into a deep cliff.
      The mesmerizing straightness and emptiness of
the road in front of me was broken by a man standing
on the roadside.  His thumb pointed in the same
direction as the stretch of road.  As my car approached
him, I noticed his stern posture and the deep, defining
wrinkles of his face.  His skin was the shade of an
earthen clay pot.  My curiosity for the Indian culture
sent a bolt of electricity through my body as I stopped
the car beside the man.  I opened the passenger door,
staring into his eyes.  He climbed in and offered me a
wrinkled, calloused hand, declaring, "My name is
Pawatakawa.  Thank you."
      I introduced myself.  "I'm new to this area.  Are
you a Hopi?"
      "I am," he answered with a booming conviction.
"What brings you here?"
      I started to drive.  "I wish to find out more
about your culture.  I found reading books or seeing an
exhibit in a museum about the Hopi culture rather
interesting, but I wish to experience the culture
first-hand."  I turned to him and said, "This land is so
beautiful out here.""
      "We Hopis are part of this land, not merely
users of the land," Pawatakawa remarked.  "When one
understands this relationship, one understands the
need to keep the earth alive and intact for the next
generation."
      I reflected on his statement.  "Where does this
relationship come from?" I asked.  "Do you have a
creation myth?"
      Pawatakawa smiled, contorting his well-grooved
face, emitting a warm grin reflecting many years of
acquired wisdom.  "I trust you are not like other
newcomers I have met here.  Very few of the tourists
are interested in discovering one's spiritual roots.  I
will be very happy to share mine with you."  I hadn't
asked how far he wanted to travel on the road, but
suddenly this issue was not important.
      The Hopi began, "First there was only the
Creator, Taiowa." The last word he said repeated itself
in my head; it reminded me of
TaeUlChunSangWonGun, the name and title for the
ancient creator of heaven in the TaeUlJu Chant of
JeungSan Do.  "There was no beginning, no end, no
time, no shape: no life,  just an immeasurable void that
had its beginning and end only in the mind of Taiowa
the Creator."  He spoke as if reciting a soliloquy so
familiar in his heart.
      "Then he, the infinite, conceived the finite.
First he created the being Sotuknang, a man, to make
the finite manifest, saying to him, 'I have created you,
the first power and instrument as a person, to carry out
my plan for life in endless space.  I am your uncle.
You are my nephew.  Go now and lay out these
universes in proper order so they may work
harmoniously with one another according to my plan.'"

      "Sotuknang," I said to myself.  "This is getting
interesting.  Isn't the name of the man who created
JeungSan Do JeungSan-Kang?  Another word for
'Jeung' is 'Sot' in Korean which means a pot that cooks
a rice-cake.  'San' means mountain in Korean I wonder
what 'u' means in Hopi?"
      He went on with his intonations of the creation
story and I dared not interrupt him.  "Sotuknang
arranged what is called the Nine Universal Kingdoms."

      "Nine Universal Kingdoms!  You mean Nine
Heavens," I thought.
      Pawatakawa continued, "Sotuknang went to the
universe of the First World and out of it he created a
woman who was to remain on that planet and be his
helper.  Her name was Kokyanwuti, or Spider Woman."

      "Or the TaeMo Go - Ko -," I whispered quietly
to myself with a big grin.
      "When she awoke to life and received her name,
she asked, 'Why am I here?'  'Look around you',
answered Sotuknang.
      " 'Here is this planet that we have created
together.  It has shape and substance, direction and
time, a beginning and an end.  But there is no life upon
it.  We see no joyful movement.  We hear no joyful
sound.  What is life without sound and movement?  So
you have been given the power to help us create this
life.  You have been given the knowledge, wisdom, and
love to bless all the beings you create.  That is why you
are here.' "
      I glanced over at Pawatakawa.  He was telling
the story with his hands, spinning, offering, and
creating along with the characters.  After catching a
breath he resumed his atonement.   "Following his
instructions, Spider Woman took some earth, mixed
with it some tuchvala (saliva) and molded it into two
beings.  To the one on the right Spider Woman said,
'You are Poqanghoya and you are to help keep this
world in order when life is put upon it.  Go now
around all the world and put your hands upon the
earth so that it will become fully solidified.  This is
your duty.'
      "Spider Woman then said to the twin on the left,
'you are Palongawhoya and you are to help keep this
world in order when life is put upon it.  This is your
duty now: go about all the world and send out sound so
that it may be heard throughout all the land.  When
you are heard you will also be known as 'Echo', for all
sound echoes the Creator.'
      "Poqanghoya, traveling throughout the earth,
solidified the higher reaches into great mountains.
The lower reaches he made firm but still pliable
enough to be used by those beings to be placed upon it
and who would call it their mother.  Palongawhoya,
traveling through the earth, sounded out his call as he
was bidden.  All the vibratory centers along the earth's
axis from pole to pole resounded his call; the whole
earth trembled; the universe quivered in tune.  Thus he
made the whole world an instrument of sound,
resounding praise to the Creator of all.  'This is your
voice, Uncle,' Sotuknang said to Taiowa.  'Everything
is tuned to your sound.'"  Then I suddenly recalled the
sound of the Tae-Ul-Ju chant as I heard Pawatakawa's
words.
      "When they had accomplished their duties,"
Pawatakawa continued, "Poqanghoya was sent to the
north pole of the world and Palongawhoya to the south
pole, where they were jointly commanded to keep the
world properly rotating.  Thus the First World was
created and Spider Woman brought forth the First
People on earth.
      "The First People were pure and happy.  The
First People understood their own structure and
functions - the nature of man himself.  The living body
of man and the living body of the earth were
constructed in the same way.  Through each ran an
axis, man's axis being the backbone, the vertebral
column, which controlled the equilibrium of his
movements and his functions.  Along this axis were
several vibratory centers which echoed the primordial
sound of life throughout the universe or sounded a
warning if anything went wrong.
      "The first of these vibratory centers in man lay
at the top of the head.  Here, when he was born, was
the soft spot, the kopavi, the 'open door' through which
he received his life and communicated with his
Creator.  With every breath the soft spot moved up and
down with a gentle vibration which talked to the
Creator.  At the time of the red light, Talawva, the last
phase of his creation, the soft spot was hardened and
the door was closed.  It remained closed until his death,
opening then for his life to depart as it had come.
      "Just below it lay the second center, the organ
that man learned to use by himself, the thinking organ
called the brain.  Its earthly function enabled man to
think about his actions and work on this earth.  But the
more he understood that his work and actions should
conform to the plan of the Creator, the more clearly he
understood that the real function of the thinking
organ called the brain was carrying out the plan of all
Creation.
      "The third center lay in the throat.  It tied
together those openings in his nose and mouth through
which he received the breath of life and the vibratory
organs that enabled him to give back his breath in
sound.  This primordial sound, very much like the
sound coming from the vibratory centers of the body
of the earth, was attuned to the universal vibration of
all Creation.  New and diverse sounds were given forth
by these vocal organs in the form of speech and song;
their primary function was to use this center to speak
and sing praises to the Creator."
      "Yes, and that is what TaeUlJu is,"  I thought.
      "The fourth center was the heart.  It too was a
vibrating organ, pulsing with the vibration of life
itself.  In his heart man felt the good of life, its sincere
purpose.  He was of One Heart.  But there were those
who permitted evil feelings to enter.  They were said to
be of Two Hearts.
      "The last of man's important centers lay under
his navel.  It was the throne in man of the Creator
himself.  From it the sound of the Creator originated.
From it the Creator directed all the functions of man."
What he had just explained was what TaeUlJu
Chanting meditation was all about.  And he was much
more eloquent than I could ever be about explaining
TaeUlJu meditation.  A sudden surge of respect for
him emerged from within me.
      "The First People knew no sickness.  Not until
evil entered the world did people get sick in the body
or head.  It was then that a medicine man, knowing
how man was constructed, could tell what was wrong
with a person by examining these centers.
      "Thus the First People understood themselves.
But gradually those with Two Hearts increased in
numbers and they forgot the commands of Sotuknang
and the Spider Woman to respect their Creator.  More
and more they used the vibratory centers of their
bodies solely for earthly purposes, forgetting that their
primary purpose was to carry out the plan of Creation.
      "But among all the people of different races and
languages there were a few in every group who still
lived by the laws of Creation.  To them came
Sotuknang.  He came with the sound of a mighty wind
and suddenly appeared before them.  He said, 'I have
observed this state of affairs.  It is not good.  It is so
bad I talked to my Uncle, Taiowa, about it.  We have
decided this world must be destroyed and another one
created so you people can start over again.  You are the
ones we have chosen.' They listened carefully to their
instructions.  Said Sotuknang, 'you will go to a certain
place.  Your kopavi (vibratory center on top of the
head) will lead you.  This inner wisdom will give you
the sight to see a certain cloud, which you will follow
by day, and a certain star, which you will follow by
night.'
      "After many days and nights they arrived at the
certain place from many parts of the world.  When the
last ones arrived Sotuknang appeared.  'Well, you are
all here, you people I have chosen to save from the
destruction of this world.  Now come with me.' He led
them to a big mound where the Ant People lived,
stamped on the roof, and commanded the Ant People to
open up their home.  When an opening was made on the
top of the anthill, Sotuknang said to the people, "Now
you will enter this Ant kiva, where you will be safe
when I destroy the world.  While you are here I want
you to learn a lesson from these Ant People.  They are
industrious.  They gather food in the summer for the
winter.  They keep cool when it is not and warm when
it is cool.  They live peacefully with one another.  They
obey the plan of Creation."
      "So the people went down to live with the Ant
people.  When they were all safe and settled, Taiowa
commanded Sotuknang to destroy the world.
Sotuknang destroyed it by fire because the Fire Clan
had been its leaders.  He rained fire upon the earth.
He opened up the volcanoes.  Fire came from above
and below and all around until the earth, the waters,
the air, all was one element, fire, and there was
nothing left except the people inside the womb of the
earth.
      "Finally, that which had been the First World
cooled off.  Sotuknang purified it.  Then he began to
create the Second World.  He changed its form
completely, putting land where the water was and
water where the land had been, so the people upon
their emergence would have nothing to remind them of
the previous wicked world.
      "Then Sotuknang said to the people, 'Make your
emergence now to this Second World I have created.  It
is not quite so beautiful as the First World, but
nevertheless it is still beautiful.  Your will like it.  So
multiply and be happy.  But remember your Creator
and the laws he gave you.  When I hear you singing
joyful praises to him I will know you are my children,
and you will be close to me in your hearts.
      "So the people emerged to the Second World.  In
this world people were separated from the animals.
The people tended to their own affairs.  They built
homes, then villages and trails between them.  They
made things with their hands and stored food like the
Ant People.  Then they began to trade and barter with
one another.
      "This was when the trouble started.  Everything
they needed was on this Second World, but they began
to want more.  More and more they traded for things
they didn't need, and the more goods they got, the
more they wanted.  This was very serious.  They did
not realize they were meandering, step by step, from
the good life given them.  They just forgot to sing
joyful praises to the Creator and soon began to sing
praises for the goods they bartered and stored.  Before
long it happened as it had to happen.  The people
began to quarrel and fight, and soon wars between
villages became commonplace.
      "There were still a few people in every village
who sang the song of their Creation.  But the wicked
people laughed at them until they could sing it only in
their hearts.  Even so, Sotuknang heard it through their
centers and the centers of the earth.  Suddenly, one day
he appeared before them.
      " 'Spider Woman tells me your thread is running
out on this world,' he announced.  'Now my Uncle,
Taiowa, and I have decided we must do something
about it.  We are going to destroy this Second World
just as soon as we put you people who still have the
song in your hearts in a safe place.' "
      "So again, as on the First World, Sotuknang
called on the Ant People to open up their underground
world for the chosen people.  When they were safely
underground, Sotuknang commanded the twins,
Poqanghoya and Palongawhoya, to leave their posts at
the north and south ends of the world's axis, where
they were stationed to keep the earth properly rotating.

      "The twins had hardly abandoned their stations
when the world, with no one to control it, teetered off
balance, spun around crazily, then rolled over twice.
Mountains plunged with a great splash, seas and lakes
sloshed over the land; and as the world spun thorough
cold and lifeless space it froze into solid ice.  This was
the end of Tokpa, the Second World."

      I was startled when I had noticed how
strikingly the axis shifting in Pawatakawa's myth
resonated with the idea in the book of JeungSan Do of
a three-hundred sixty degree shifting of the earth's
axis every 129,000 years in order to bring about the
Cosmic Winter. I further carried out the comparison,
and wondered if the statement 'the thread is running
out' could signify that the Cosmic Winter time has
come according to JeungSan Do.  Perhaps this was a
previous Cosmic year civilization.
      "Eventually Sotuknang ordered Poqanhoya and
Palongawhoya back to their stations at the poles of the
world axis.  With a great shudder and a splintering of
ice the planet began rotating again.  When it was
revolving smoothly about its own axis and stately
moving in its universal orbit, the ice began to melt and
the world began to warm to life.  Sotuknang set about
creating the Third World: arranging seas, planting
mountains and plains with their proper coverings, and
creating all forms of life.
      "When the earth was ready for occupancy, he
came to the Ant kiva with the proper approach as
before and said, 'Open the door.  It is time for you to
come out.' "  I pictured an image of people rising out of
the womb of the earth.  In The Truth of JeungSan Do
book the Master Teacher claimed that there was a
Womb on our planet earth where people sprung forth
when the Cosmic Spring Time came.
      " 'I have saved you so you can be planted again
on this new Third World.  But you must always
remember the two things I am saying to you now.
First, respect me and one another.  And second, sing in
harmony from the tops of the hills.  When I do not hear
you singing praises to your Creator I will know you
have gone back to evil again.'
      "So the people climbed up the ladder from the
Ant kiva, making their Emergence to the Third World.
Now in the Third World they multiplied in such
numbers and advanced so rapidly that they created big
cities, countries, a whole civilization.  This made it
difficult for them to confirm to the plan of Creation
and to sing praises to Taiowa and Sotuknang.  More
and more of them became wholly occupied with their
own earthly plans.  It was especially disconcerting
because so many people were using their reproductive
power in wicked ways.
      "Some of them made a patuwvota, a shield made
of hide, and with their creative power made it fly
through the air.  On this many of the people flew to a
big city, attacked it, and returned so fast no one knew
where they came from.  Soon the people of many cities
and countries were making patuwvotas and flying on
them to attack one another.  So corruption and war
came to the Third World as it had to the others.
      "This time Sotuknang came to Spider Woman
and said, 'There is no use waiting until the thread runs
out this time.  Something has to be done lest the people
with the song in their hearts are corrupted and killed
off too.  It will be difficult, with all this destruction
going on, for them to gather at the far end of the
world I have designated.  But I will help them.  Then
you will save them when I destroy this world with
water.'
      " 'How shall I save them?' asked Spider Woman.
      " 'When you get there look about you,'
commanded Sotuknang.  'You will see these tall plants
with hollow stems.  Cut them down and put the people
inside.'
      "After Spider Woman had done this, Sotuknang
let loose the waters upon the earth.  Waves higher than
mountains rolled in upon the land.  Continents broke
asunder and sank beneath the seas.  And still the rains
fell; the waves rolled in.  Only the people sealed up in
their hollow reeds were saved."  I thought to myself
that this must had been when the Time of Cosmic
Summer came, when the Southern civilization of
Atlantis and the Mu continent sunk under the Ocean.
      "The people sealed up in their hollow reeds
heard the mighty rushing of the waters.  They felt
themselves tossed high in the air and dropping back to
the water.  Then all was quiet, and they knew they
were floating.  For a long, long time - so long a time
that it seemed it would never end - they kept floating.

      "Finally, their movement ceased.  The Spider
Woman unsealed their hollow reeds, took them by the
tops of their heads, and pulled them out.  Looking
about them, they saw they were on a little piece of
land that had been the top of one of their highest
mountains.  All else, as far as they could see, was
water.  This was all that remained of the Third World.
      "Then Sotuknang appeared to Kokyangwuti,
Spider Woman, and said, 'You must continue traveling
on.  Your inner wisdom will guide you.  The door at
the top of your head is open.'
      "So Spider Woman directed the people to make
round, flat boats of the hollow reeds they had come in
and to crawl inside.  Again they entrusted themselves
to the water and the inner wisdom to guide them.  For
a long time they drifted with the wind and the
movement of the waters and came to another rocky
island.
      " 'It is bigger than the other one, but it is not
big enough,' they said.  'No.  It is not big enough,' said
Spider Woman.
      "So people traveled toward the rising sun in
their reed boats.  Crossing many islands, finally they
came to a great land, a mighty land, their inner
wisdom told them.  'The Fourth World!' they cried to
each other.
      "Soon all the others arrived and when they were
gathered together Sotuknang appeared before them.
Looking to the west and the south, the people could see
sticking out of the water the islands upon which they
had rested.  As people watched them, the closest one
sank under the water, then the next, until all were
gone, and they could see only water.
      " 'See', said Sotuknang, 'I have washed away
even the footprints of your emergence; the
stepping-stones which I left for you.  Down on the
bottom of the seas lie all the proud cities, the flying
patuwvotas, and the worldly treasures corrupted with
evil, and those people who found no time to sing
praises to the Creator from the tops of their hills.  But
the day will come, if you preserve the memory and the
meaning of your emergence, when these
stepping-stones will emerge again to prove the truth
you speak.
      "We Hopis came to this land by sea.  The name
of this Fourth World is Tuwaqachi, or World Complete.
When we landed on this new land, according to the
legend, we Hopis were told by the guiding spirit of our
land that there will come a time when this land will be
flooded with strangers.  When that happens, we are to
prepare for the coming of the Fifth world.
      "This time," I told Pawatakawa,  "Sotuknang
himself was born on earth as a person to prepare the
humanity for the coming of the Fifth world."
      Pawatakawa raised an eyebrow.  "Are you now
telling me your  creation myth?"
      I spoke in sincerity.  "Well, I'm not so sure that
mine is much different from yours," I answered.  "His
name was Kang, Il-Sun or Kang, Jeung-San.  His wife
was the TaeMo Go SuBuNim.  He gave us the TaeUlJu
chant to sing.  It is a song about
TaeUlChunSangWonGun, TaeUl Heaven - High King -
or Taiowa, a song of Creation.  He told us that this
time the world will see a shifting of its axis, causing
volcanoes in the east and floods in the west.  Yet this
time he shall harvest those who are pure at heart by
afflicting this humanity with a sudden attack of
diseases.  He told us to know the cure which in part
involves the Song of Creation: the TaeUlJu Chant."
      Collecting his thoughts, Pawatakawa put his
hands together, his fingertips touching, and took a
deep breath.  "And do you know this chant?"
      I recited the TaeUlJu several times as I drove
along the flat red stretch of earth: "Hum-Chi Hum-Chi
Tae-Ul-Chun-Sang-Won-Gun; Hum-Ri-Chi-Ya-Do-Rae
Hum-Ri-Ham-Ri-Sa-Pa-Aha . . . ."  Wearing a smile, I
turned to him and bowed my head slightly.  "Try
chanting with me if you wish."  I started him off
slowly, and after a few repetitions, Pawatakawa rode
the rhythm of the chant.
      We then looked at each other and stopped the
chant; I sensed he had something to say.  "The sound
has a uniting quality to it that reminds me of our
creator, Taiowa, as everything is tuned to Taiowa's
sound.  I find this interesting, Kan."
      He continued, his hand gestures still offering
their enhancement of the commentary.  "I sense power
in your voice.  I am interested as to why you have such
a conviction for the chant," Pawatakawa remarked.
"What intrigues me more is how you claim your chant
dovetails with the Creation Myth of the Hopi's. In
exchange for the ride, I would like to invite you to
watch a ceremony of ours tomorrow.    I would also
like to continue this conversation."
      I once again bowed my head and smiled, this
time in gratitude.  "Even though JeungSan Do
originated in Korea, I feel we've got more in common
than we think."  I said.
      We chanted TaeUlJu together until we arrived
at his house.  He went home and we promised to meet
tomorrow and he was going to show me Hopi Fall
Ritual.  I checked into a nearby motel.

      Late the next afternoon, the sky shone in
radiant crimson as the sun, a fiery chunk of earth,
united itself once again with the horizon.
Pawatakawa had met me on the walk to the Hopi
ritual.  "The ceremony lasts sixteen days," he remarked.
"Its immediate purpose is to bring rain for the final
maturity of the crops, but its meaning and importance
to the Hopi's goes beyond that."
      Wrinkled and leathery, his hands, as old as they
were, became alive and animated as he described the
ritual, swirling, pointing, and building.  "You shall see
The Snake Altar, which features the images of two
Snake Maidens, and The Antelope Altar, which is set
on a sand painting in about a four feet square,
bordered with lines of directional colors, and at each
corner is a 'cloud mountain', a small cone of sand in
which is stuck a hawk feather.  On it are placed a Corn
Mother and four directions, and several bowls of water
from the Flute Spring.  The whole altar complex
represents the world as it was formed by earth, air,
water, plant life and mankind.  The complete
construction of the altar takes eleven days.
      "The ritual shall be acted out by members of the
Snake and Antelope Klans.  Before the midnight of the
eleventh day of the ceremony, the Snake chief brings
in a young girl, the Snake Maiden.  The Snake Maiden
and the Snake Chief meet the Antelope Chief with a
young man, the Antelope Youth.  There shall be a
ritual symbolic marriage between the Snake Maiden
and the Antelope Youth.  Today is the eleventh day
and we shall be able to see the Mystic Marriage."
      We arrived at the grounds of the ritual that
evening as he continued his commentary. "The Snake
Maiden is seated on the south side and the Antelope
Youth on the north side of the altar level.  Between the
fire pit and the altar is set an earthen bowl containing
soapy water made from yucca roots.  In front of the
altar is placed a woven plaque full of many kinds of
seeds."  The girl and boy were then brought to the bowl
by their chiefs, and a wedding ceremony was
performed according to Hopi custom.  The Snake
Maiden's hair was washed in the milky seminal fluid
of the yucca root by the Snake Chief, and the Antelope
Youth's by the Antelope Chief.  The two chiefs
exchanged places to wash the hair again, then twisted
it together while it was still wet to symbolize the
union.  The couple was then conducted to the seating
ledge on the north side, the girl being seated upon the
plaque of seeds which had been brought by the
Antelope Chief.  "The seeds signify food for the birds
of the air, the animals of the earth, and man," said
Pawatakawa.
      "It is now midnight and pavasio begins - the
period of concentration and the singing of the songs.
It lasts until the stars in Orion's belt are hanging above
the western horizon."  Snake Maiden and Antelope
Youth remained seated together until it was finished,
being careful not to fall asleep.  Then they were
blessed and the girl was taken home by her godmother,
the boy by his godfather.
      The marriage seemed to have similarities with
the balancing of the Yim and Yang forces according to
the book of JeungSan Do.  I kept thinking of the
Marriage Ritual between the TaeMo Go suBuNim and
the JeungSan SangJeNim.  I told Pawatakawa of this
connection, to which he responded with a gentle smile,
"I had a feeling you would find a parallel in our
ritual."
      He told me of his interpretation of the
significance of the mystic marriage ritual.  "For as the
bodies of man and the world are similar in structure,
the deep bowels of the earth in which the snake makes
its home are equated with the lowest of man's
vibratory centers, which controls his generative organs.
Conversely, the antelope is associated with the highest
center in man, for its horn is located at the top or
crown of the head, the kopavi, which in man is the
place of coming in and going out of life, the 'open
door' through which he spiritually communicates with
his Creator.  Thus the marriage of the two signifies the
final achievement in man's search for the harmony
within himself.  The final harvest of self knowledge.

      The next morning was the twelfth day of the
ritual, Pawatakawa went out with all the members to
gather snakes and I accompanied him.  "The snake hunt
lasts four days: first to the west, to the south, to the
east, and finally to the north," Pawatakawa pointed
out.  There were a number of initiates.  Each carried a
water jar, a sack of cornmeal, and a kwawicki of two
buzzard feathers tied together.
      "These wing feathers of the buzzard have gray
spots underneath which possess a strange odor and the
power to soften the anger of a snake when they are
waved over its head.  The snakes are not actually
afraid or angry at man; they only coil to strike when
they see what is in man's mind and heart.  One, then,
must be of good heart and not be afraid.  He must
never try to pick up a coiled snake.  He must wave the
snake whip over him until he uncoils."  Pawatakawa
said.
      So he blessed the snake with cornmeal, with the
sun, and with the earth, and then picked him up.  When
the snake began to fight, Pawatakawa held him behind
the head with his left hand, spat in the palm of his
right hand, and began to brush the snake full length.
The snake soon hung limp as a length of rope.

      It was the morning of the fifteenth day,
Pawatakawa brought me to Hotevilla town to watch
the Antelope Race and the Snake Race.  By now I
became a very close friend of Pawatakawa and I was
getting caught in the excitement of the on-going ritual.
According to him the Antelope Race was held on the
morning of the fifteenth day, and the Snake Race on
the morning of the sixteenth.  The two races were
substantially alike, members of both klans
participating in each.
      Early that morning, house roofs and cliff tops
were crowded with people, most of them huddled in
thin cotton blankets against the thin wind of dawn
sweeping up from the desert.  They created large
silhouettes against the dawning sun behind them.
Below the steep side of the mesa the earth was neatly
terraced for tiny fields, which gave way to larger
fields planted between great dunes of encroaching
sand.  Beyond, far to the west, stretched the empty
desert, now yellow under the rising sun.
      For a while there was no more to see.
Gradually in the paling shadow of the cliffs one
distinguished at the curve of the trail below a group of
Snake and Antelope priests patiently waiting, the
Snakes painted dark brown, the Antelopes ash-gray.
Farther away more dim and diminutive men emerged
on the trail, carrying green cornstalks, squash, and
melon vines.  Then Pawatakawa pointed to the horizon
with his chin.  "They are coming."
      Suddenly the leading runner sprinted up.  The
old priest handed him the pahos and water jar.  Then
the runner headed for the foot of the cliffs.
      The thought of water rising out from below and
coming up reminded me of the TaeUlJu Chanting
Meditation - and the rising of the natural water
energy.  This was a ritual race that spelled out the
needed solution for the troubled humanity today.
      A tremor of excitement rippled through the
crowd.  The other runners were trying hard, urged on
by the men along the trail, waving their cornstalks and
vines,  loudly encouraged by the Snakes and Antelopes
waiting at the foot of the cliffs.  It was no use.  The
runner was a young boy of perhaps sixteen, and none
could catch him.  Reaching the foot of the mesa, he
began clambering up the steep, rocky trail, urged on by
the Snakes and Antelopes whirling their tovokinpi
(rolling thunder) or bullroarers (sticks tied to the ends
of strings).  They spun them lasso-like to simulate the
roaring sound of low thunder.
      The young boy reached the kiva before the rest
of the runners began panting up the mesa,
accompanied by all the Snakes and Antelopes and the
men carrying cornstalks squash vines.  There were
ribald calls from the crowd on top, jokes and laughter.

      If the mystic marriage of Snake Maiden and
Antelope Youth expressed the purpose and end of the
ceremony, then the Antelope and Snake Races
symbolize the means for me.  The mystic marriage of
Snake Maiden and Antelope Youth was the union of
man's two life forces, the physical embodied in the
lowest center at the base of the spine and the spiritual
residing in the psychological center at the crown of the
head.  And the path between them was symbolized by
this race today; a water jar arising to purify the
spiritual center at the top of the head.  The whole
ritual so far had a deeply meditative effect on me.

      The Antelope Dance was given at sunset on the
day of the Antelope Race, and the Snake Dance
followed the Race on the next day.  The two dances,
like the two races, were similar, save that the familiar
squash, melon, and bean vines were used in the
Antelope Dance, and the snakes were danced with only
in the concluding Snake Dance.
      "Running Antelopes make the sound of thunder
whose vibration stimulates the clouds to come out of
their shrines.  Hence the Antelope Dance first draws
the clouds.  The bull snake has the power to suck out
life and rain from the clouds.  So on the following day
the Snake Dance brings rain," Pawatakawa explained
to me.
      "The Snake members paint most of their bodies
with a composition of suta (red mineral) and yalaha
(deep red mineral).  A large oval over breasts and
shoulders is painted white with tuma (white clay).
White is also used for a strip covering the upper part
of the forehead and the front of the throat.  The rest
of the face is blackened with monha.  Each member
wears a reddish-brown kirtle with a black design of a
snake, and brown fringed moccasins.  On both are sewn
seashells.
      He went on with his detailed explanations with
a great enthusiasm.  "In contrast the Antelope members
paint themselves ash-gray with white zigzag lines
running up from their breasts to the shoulders and
down the arms to the fingers, and down the front of
the legs to their big toes.  The rattle which each will
carry is a gourd covered with the skin of the testicle of
an antelope.  Each wears a white kirtle and
embroidered sash.  As a final touch the chin is outlined
by a white line from ear to ear."
      Suddenly the Antelopes and Snakes filed into
the plaza - two rows of twelve men each, like a pair of
prayer sticks for each of the six directions, the
Antelopes ash-gray and white, the Snakes
reddish-brown and black.  Today was the last day of
the ritual and I was about to witness the famous Hopi
Snake Dance.  The appearance of the Snake chief
struck the keynote of the somber scene.  There was
something neolithic about his heavy, powerfully-built
long arms and his loose black hair hanging to his
massive shoulders.  At the end of the line trudged a
small boy.  Silently they encircled the plaza four times
- a strange silence accentuated by the slight rattle of
gourds and seashells.  As each passed in front of the
kisi he bent forward and with the right foot stomped
powerfully upon the pochta, the sounding board over
the sipapuni.  In the thick, somber silence the dull,
resonant stamp sounded like a faint rumble from
underground, echoed a moment later, like thunder
from the distant storm clouds.
      "This is the supreme moment of mystery in the
Snake Dance," Pawatakawa whispered to me with an
eager excitement, "the thaumaturgical climax of the
whole Snake-Antelope ceremony.  Never elsewhere does
one hear such a sound so deep and powerful.  It assures
those below that those above are dutifully carrying on
the ceremony.  It awakens the vibratory centers deep
within the earth to resound along the world axis with
the same vibration."
      The Snake Chief at the same moment stooped in
front of the kisi, then straightened up with a snake in
his mouth.  He held it gently but firmly between his
teeth, just below the head.  With his left hand he held
the upper part of the snake's body level with his chest,
and with the right hand the lower length of the snake
level with his waist.  "That is the proper manner of
handling a snake during the dance," my Hopi friend
told me.  Immediately a second Snake priest stepped up
with a feathered snake whip in his right hand, with
which to stroke the snake.  "He is commonly known as
the guide, for his duty is to conduct the dancer in a
circle around the plaza."  As they moved away from
the kisi another dancer and his guide paused to pick
out a snake, and so on, until even the small boy at the
end was dancing with a snake in his mouth for the
first time.  It was a large rattlesnake, its flat birdlike
head flattened against his cheek.  All seemed to show
the same easy familiarity with the snakes as they had
with the squash vines the day before.
      After dancing around the plaza the dancer
removed the snake from his mouth and placed it
carefully on the ground.  Then the Snake Chief and his
guide stopped at the kisi for another snake.  A third
man, who Pawatakawa called the 'snake-gatherer,' now
approached the loose snake.  It was coiled and was
ready to strike.  The gatherer watched it carefully,
making no move until it uncoiled and began to wriggle
quickly across the plaza.  Then he dexterously picked
it up, holding it by one of the Antelopes, singing in the
long line.  The Antelope, smoothing the snake's
undulating body with his right hand, continued
singing.
      The ceremony went on in a kind of mesmeric
enchantment in the darkening afternoon.  There was
nothing exciting about the men dancing with snakes in
their mouths - only a dignity that revealed how deeply
they were immersed in the mystery, and a strange sense
of power that seemed to envelop them.  The seashells
with their slight, odd sound were calling to their
mother water to come and replenish the earth.  "The
song of the Antelopes is describing the clouds coming
from the four directions, describing the rain falling.
All the Hopis know that if it does not rain during the
Home Dance of Niman Kachina, rain will come with
the Snake Dance.  This is the consummation of the
union of the two universal polarities, the release of
that mystic rain which recharges all the psychic
centers of the body and renews the whole stream of
life in man and earth alike,"  Pawatakawa told me.

      After the Snake Dance Pawatakawa said that
the whole ritual was over.  He invited me to stay at his
house for the night.  On the walk to his house, I asked
him if he knew any other Hopi stories or legends.  "The
one that immediately comes to mind," he answered, "Is
the legend of Pahana."
      "This is a very strange yet profound legend," he
went on.  "It is said when Hopis first arrived in this
land, they were given a stone tablet with a missing
corner piece by Masaw - the guiding spirit of this land.
On the tablet was marked a picture of a man without a
head.  With the tablet Masaw gave following words to
remember for the Hopis."  As if he was remembering
one of his past lives, he spoke with a deep reflection.
"This is what he said, as marked on the tablet: After
the Fire Clan of the Hopis had migrated to a
permanent home, the time would come when we would
be overcome by a strange people.  We Hopis would be
forced to develop our land and lives according to the
dictates of a new ruler, or else we would be treated as
criminals and be punished.  But we were not to resist.
We were to wait for the person who would deliver us.
      "This person was our lost brother, Pahana, who
would return to us with the missing corner piece of the
tablet, deliver us from our persecutors, and work out
with us a new and universal brotherhood of man with
us.  But, warned Masaw, if our leader accepted any
other religion, he must assent to having his head cut
off.  This would dispel the evil and save his people.
      "As prescribed by prophecy, if the true Pahana
were to come, four lines of sacred wheel would be
drawn, and the Bear Clan leader would step up to the
barrier and extend his hand, palm up.  If he was
indeed the true Pahana, we Hopis know he would
extend his own hand, palm down, and clasp the Bear
Clan leader's hand to form the nakwach, the ancient
symbol of brotherhood.
      At the front gate of his house hung dried corn.
The house had earthen walls and earthen floors, yet
the inside was furnished with modernities such as
kitchen tables and cabinets.  The rain which had
started that afternoon was still falling into the night.
      At his room I placed my worship bowl to the
northern direction.  I told Pawatakawa that now I was
about to start my daily Ritual to Sotuknang and
Taiowa.  He nodded his head in approval and asked me
about my knowledge on Sotuknang.  I told him with a
firm voice, "Sotuknang, as you say, was created as the
first power and instrument as a person.  And since such
a beginning, His deeds had firmly established Him as
the ruler of all Heavens and He had come to reside on
the kingdom of the Ninth Heaven as its Highest Ruler.
And then in 1871 he was born on earth as a human
child in Korea.  His Religious name is JeungSan Kang.
He came to earth this time as a human because as we
approach the beginning of the Fifth world, humanity
has to mature fully as the divine ruler of its destiny.
Our humanity in marching toward the Fifth world had
advanced scientifically; however, we were beginning to
forget the purpose of our creation.  We were destroying
our spirituality.  Thus JeungSan came to earth as a
human child to assist humanity in fulfilling the
purpose of creation.  As a human, He reconstructed the
Heavenly order; thus in the Fifth world all human
races can coexist as brothers and sisters.  As a person
on Earth, He bade Kokyanwuti, the Spider Woman, to
be born as a woman on earth so He could greet Her as
His wedded wife.  Pawatakawa, her earth name is Go,
PanRyeu.  The Lord JeungSan SangJeNim taught us to
sing praises to Taiowa and that song is TaeUlJu Song
of Life.  After having charted the path towards the
opening of the Fifth world, the JeungSan SangJeNim
died, promising His return on the fifth world as the
Supreme Leading Spirit.  The TaeMo Go SuBuNim then
founded the JeungSan Do religion and taught people to
sing TaeUlJu Song of Life.  In order for current
humanity to be saved we all need to sing the TaeUlJu
Song of Life.  This time the key to entering the Fifth
world is completely dependent on the TaeUlJu Song of
Life.  This time, neither JeungSan SangJeNim nor the
TaeMo Go SuBuNim shall be the ones who save.  This
time the main savior shall be we humans.  We shall
determine who shall be saved.  We shall select our own
entry into the Fifth world by singing or not singing the
TaeUlJu song of life.  This time humanity shall fulfill
the purpose of creation.  The path toward the Fifth
world has already been charted by the JeungSan
SangJeNim.  Our current humanity had been pushed
into that path by the TaeMo Go SuBuNim.  Now we
need to walk on that charted path in order to complete
our destined purpose of creation."
      I saw his eyes sparkle.  I stood up and bowed to
the JeungSan SangJeNim and the TaeMo Go SuBuNim
four times and he accompanied me.  We then chanted
the TaeUlJu Song of Life together, accompanied by the
peaceful sound of rain drops outside.  Soon I noticed
Pawatakawa poking my shoulder.  Without stopping the
chant and without opening my eyes, I looked around.
His soul ascended from his body and was hovering
above it.  His soul looked surprised to be out of its
body and it was desperately poking my shoulder for
assurance.  I held his soul by the hand and we both
ascended to the thatched ceiling.  I could see both my
body and his body in deep chanting meditation below.
Up at the ceiling I saw a Hopi man and a woman
approaching us.  They both called out "Pawatakawa!"
Pawatakawa looked overjoyed and rushed up to them.
They hugged each other warmly.  Pawatakawa turned
to me and introduced them as his deceased parents.  I
bowed to them and they bowed with me.  I noticed they
were wet, wearing the kachina costume.
      Understanding my curiosity, the man spoke in
Hopi.  "We both partook today's ceremony of the Snake
Dance.  We accompanied the rain kachina (rain spirit)
today.  The rain you saw today is our joy and dance.
The rain you saw today is the kachina.  The rain you
saw today is our body and mind.  The rain is us.  I
noticed that the rain has stopped now.  Welcome, my
Eastern brother."
He extended his
arm to me palm up.
I extended my arm
palm down and
grabbed hold of his
hand in Yim-Yang
form and shook his
hand.  In his left
hand he was
holding a stone
tablet with a
broken off corner.
In my left hand I
was holding my
copy of the book
The Truth of
JeungSan Do.  I
suddenly noticed
that I was dressed
in traditional
Korean white robe.
On his stone tablet,
there was a picture
of a man without a
head.  On the cover
of my copy of the
book The Truth of
JeungSan Do, there
was a strange
picture, the
meaning of which I
never understood.
It could have been a
man's head; it could
have been a bear's head; then again, it could have been
some kind of a bird.  Next to the picture it was
written, "The Light of the Savior is in the East."
      The man placed his stone tablet underneath the
picture on the cover of my book.  The picture of a man
without a head on the tablet seen together with the
image on the cover of The truth of JeungSan Do formed
a picture of a living kachina.  The man proclaimed,
"Eototo!  Chief of all Kachinas!"  The newly formed
kachina jumped out and proclaimed in the air,  "I am
Eototo, the leading kachina, the chief of all the
kachinas. And the chief kachina of the Bear Clan."  His
round, bare mask of white buckskin was painted with
only three black dots for eyes and a mouth and
embellished on the top with only three sparrow-hawk
feathers.  He bowed to all twenty-four directions and
announced to earth and heaven, "Our brother from the
East, Pahana, has finally come!"  Soon many other
kachinas gathered around him.  They all hugged me.
Then all kachinas declared,  "Bring in a feast for our
brother from the East!"

      Upon their declaration, Pawatakawa and I both
opened our eyes and we found ourselves back in our
bodies.  Pawatakawa stared into my eyes for a moment.
Then we heard another declaration being atoned in the
air.  "Pawatakawa, bring the guest out.  The dinner is
ready."
      Pawatakawa's aunt was calling him from the
kitchen.  We went out to the kitchen and sat on the
dinning table.  There was a well cooked corn and rice
dish waiting for us.  Pawatakawa brought two beers
from the ice-box.  He poured a glass for me.  I poured a
glass for him.  We both drank.  I handed my empty
glass to him and poured beer for him in that glass.  He
gave me his empty glass and filled beer in it for me.
We both drank.  As his aunt as a witness, we declared
we were brothers.
      We slept under one blanket that night.  He held
my hand tightly.  From the small window at the top of
the wall in the room, I could see the milky way
floating by.
            Chapter 14  L.A. Jail


      The next day I decided to go to Los Angeles and
catch a plane to Korea.  I promised Pawatakawa, that I
would return after visiting JeungSan Do Temple in
Korea.  We departed after exchanging addresses.
      I had enough money for a plane fair to Los
Angeles but not enough money for a ticket to Korea.
At Los Angeles airport I checked into a nearby motel
and called home to ask for money.  My mother sounded
worried for me but she promised to wire money for me
within couple of days.  I thanked her and soothed her
not to worry too much for me.  Despite her worries, she
sounded glad to hear that I wanted to visit Korea after
so many years away from my birthplace.
      I had a day or two to wait until money came so
I decided to tour Los Angeles.  I took a bus whose
destination seemed to be downtown Los Angeles.  After
a few stops we came into a city district with many low-
rise apartment buildings stretched along side the road.
The buildings looked worn out, as if they had been
neglected for years.  Many black youngsters hung
around on the front steps of the buildings.  At every
stop the bus picked up passengers who were black.
After about twenty minutes the bus was packed with
black passengers and I was the only non-black person
in the bus.  People were staring at me in a funny way.
I must had looked strange to them: an oriental wearing
clothes that had not been changed for over a month,
riding inside an exclusively black bus .  Women in the
bus giggled as they stared at me.  I thought my
situation was quite humorous myself and smiled back
at them.
      The bus came to a place where an odd-looking
tower decorated with many car's hub-wheels stood in
the middle of a junkyard.  The junkyard had many
collections of statues made with broken wires, junk
cars and hub wheels.  The place formed an odd
harmony with run-down buildings around.  At that
stop many people got off and I decided to get off with
them as well.
      Across the street couple of girls were playing
jump-rope.  There was a fence blocking the entrance to
the junkyard of the hubcap tower.  I peered inside.
The place had a serene quality of a meditation garden.
The organized emptiness of twentieth century human
waste made a statement of its own, predicting the
inevitable outcome of a physical god arising out of the
rusted rubble.
      Down the street a bunch of black youths with
leather jackets were standing around in a circle.  They
all had similar emblems sewn at the back of their
jackets.  I saw a glimpse of shiny metallic light being
reflected off the shiny hubcap at the top of the
junkyard tower.  Then I noticed the enlarged reflection
of a knife blade from the hubcap.  The blade turned
red and dripped blood.  I turned my head back to the
group of youngsters circled down the block.  There
were two young men fighting inside the circle.  The
larger of the two was holding a knife and he was
circling the knife to stop the approaching opponent.
His opponent was smaller, and despite the knife
wounds kept charging at his larger armed opponent. I
felt alarmed and instinctively I ran towards them.
They must had heard my footsteps.  They dispersed
into the streets except for the two who were fighting.  I
grabbed hold of the one holding the knife from the
back.  With my left arm I grabbed him by the neck and
with my right hand I grabbed his right arm which was
holding the knife.  Then everything happened at the
same time.  The smaller guy jumped at us and the guy's
knife was thrown off from his hand onto the street.
Suddenly, as if we had all promised, the dispersed
young men jumped into my view and they started
punching and kicking the youth that I was holding
back.  Even I could feel the abuse of the punches, yet
it did not occur to me to release the youth from my
locking arms.  I was stunned momentarily; unable to
make a decision.  I was swept into the scene.
      I heard sirens and saw flashing lights.  The
youngsters circling me started running.  I was frozen
on the spot.  The youth in my arms felt listless and
heavy.  I was about to lay him down when I heard
shrieking order coming behind my back.  "Get down
and spread, you asshole, Get Down!"  My arms were
yanked backwards by brute force and my head was
jerked forward.  The youth who was in my arms fell
forward with a loud thudding noise.  I felt handcuffs
around my wrists.  I heard some clicking and the
handcuffs tightened into my arms.  It began to hurt.  I
was dragged into the police car and thrown into the
back seat.  The whole thing happened so fast, yet I felt
as if I was watching the whole event in slow motion.
On the way to the police station the policeman in the
front kept saying while giggling, "We are going to
deport you back to China.  We'll deport you,
Chinaman."
      When I got to the police station, there were two
other black youngsters who were caught from the same
scene and brought in.  They acted as if they were at
their high school.  "Hey Rudie, isn't that the fucker
who was holding Jastan back?  Why the fuck did he do
that?"
      "Yeahp, it sure is him right.  Hey po--lice,
loosen up my handcuffs, they're hurting my arms.  And
when is lunch time around here?  I'm getting hungry,
man.  Fuck, those police are eating their lunches in
their offices, Frankie."  The one called Ruddie turned
to me and spoke.  "Hey, you look like Bruce Lee.  Are
you his brother?  I bet you work at a video game
company, right?  What's the name of that company,
Sho-Sho-ta or somethin', right?"
      I was finger-printed and photographed.  Then I
was walked through a barbed door.  At the front desk
of the barbed door I had to give up all of my
possessions from my pockets.  Inside there was a huge
anglo-saxon guard waiting for me.  He pushed my
shoulders and yelled at me, "What's your name?"
Without a word I looked into his eyes and held my
ground firmly.  He was a little startled and taken
aback.  Then with a gentler voice he asked me, "Where
are you from?"
      I abruptly spitted out, "Korea."
      "Hey, Hey, he is a Koong-Fu master, man, you
better be careful," Rudie yelled out behind me.  "Were
you in vietnam?  I bet you were a soldier in Nam."  The
jail guard continued, "I served in Nam for three
years...."  I felt he wanted to tell me something but he
did not.  I was locked into the first cell on the left.
      I felt almost relieved to be in a jail cell after
what had just happened that day.  I wondered what
had happened to the youth that was beaten up.  The
jail cell was surprisingly well lighted and clean.  There
were four other people in the cell.  I unobtrusively
took the bottom bunk bed at the corner.   There was a
general sense of uneasiness in the place.  The guy that
was lying above my bunk yelled out.  "She-at, what are
you in here for, China Man?  This fucking cop arrests
me for parking my car at my own drive way.  She-at.  I
got no business being here, man.  Hey, you got a
quarter, China Man?  I got to make a phone call to my
old lady."
      "No, I do not.  They took possession of
everything I had in my pocket when they arrested me."
I said.
      "She-at, I am entitled to my phone call, man.
The police grabs me right in front of my own
driveway.  Who do they think they are?  Rambo?"
      There was a toilet right behind the jail-bar and
above the toilet there was a public phone.  "Why don't
you make a collect call?"  I asked him.
      "She-at, call collect to my own lady!  No way
man.  I ain't that cheap.  She-at!"
      The man who was sitting on the lower bunk bed
across from me yelled out, "Hey, man, I was arrested
for just walking down the street, man.  This is a police
state, I'm tellin' you."
      Three more men came into the cell later that
night before I fell asleep.  I could tell they were drunk.
The cell smelled of their liquor.  The two black
youngsters who were arrested with me, Ruddie and
Frankie, were taken to different cells.  And I think
they were both in different cells because they yelled
out to each other.  Their words were coarse and they
spoke of the injustice.  I fell asleep shortly afterwards.
At early morning we were awakened and everyone in
the cell with me was called out.  I was left alone.  I
leisurely sat on the toilet, thinking of the man at the
upper bunk's holy proclamation on shit last night.

      I was served breakfast of Mexican food.  All of
a sudden across from the hall a yell came out, "Hey
jailguard, hey jail guard!  I need a shot, man.  I need a
shot badly!"  I suddenly realized that I heard that yell
all night.  "Hey, Frankie, are you there, man?"
      "Yeah, I am here Ruddie.  Are you enjoying
your breakfast, man?"
      "Breakfast?  Hey, how can you have breakfast
now, man?  Hey, jailguard!"  His cry sharply echoed in
the hall.
      "Hey, be quiet!"  The guard barked, echoing
longer than the cell man's yell.  Frankie's voice started
to sing out loud.  Ruddie joined in.  "Jailguard, hey
Jailguard, come here man, I am sick.  Come here!", both
Rudie and Frankie yelled out.  I could hear them
banging the bunk bed in the cell.
      I heard the jailguard walking to them.  "Shut
up!  Didn't I tell you to shut up?"  The guard banged on
the jail bars and went back to his post.
      After about ten minutes one of them - I thought
it was Frankie - started to yell out again.  "Hey
jailgaurd, come here, I am sick man.  I am sweating
like a pig, Hey jailguard, come here."  The guard yelled
out, "If you fucking junkies don't stop that yapping, I
am going to run down my stick into your fucking
throats.  So shut up!"
      This time Frankie yelled to Ruddie but in a
smaller voice.  "Hey, hey Ruddie, I'm trembling, man.
Fuck, my hands are shaking.  I ain't no junkie.  Fuck,
what's happening to me?  Hey, hey Ruddie, tell me of
the black man's history.  Hey, tell me how a bad-
mother-fucker black man made the evil white men."
      "O.K. Frankie, this is it, so listen up," said
Rudie.  "Hey man, Christianity teaches us that black is
a curse.  It teaches me to hate everything black,
including myself.  It taught me that everything white
is good to be admired, respected and loved.  It
brainwashed this 'Negro' to think I am superior if my
complexion showed more of the white pollution of the
slavemaster.  This white man's Christian religion
further deceived and brainwashed this 'negro' to
always turn the other cheek, and grin, and scrape, and
bow, and be humble, and to sing, and to pray, and to
take whatever was dished out by the devilish white
man, and to look for his pie in the sky, and for his
heaven in the hereafter, while right here on earth the
slavemaster white man enjoyed his heaven."  While
Rudie was saying this Frankie went on agreeing with
him loudly, "Yeahp, yeahp, you are right on, man."
      "Hey, Frankie, did you know that the first
humans, the Original Man, were a black people.  They
founded the Holy City Mecca."  Rudie yelled out to
Frankie and Frankie responded, "You bet brother."
      "Among this black race were twenty-four wise
scientists.  One of the scientists, at odds with the rest,
created the especially strong black tribe of Shabazz,
from which America's Negroes, so-called, descended."
      Then this time Frankie jutted into the narrative
as if he couldn't wait untill Ruddie finished the whole
story.  "And yeah, brother, about 6600 years ago, when
seventy percent of the people were satisfied, and thirty
percent were dissatisfied, among the dissatisfied was
born a 'Mr. Yacub.'  It is told he was born to create
trouble, to break the peace, and to kill.  His head was
unusually large.  When he was four years old, he began
school.  At the age of eighteen, Yacub had studied at
all of his nation's colleges and universities.  He was
known as 'the big-head scientist.'  Among many other
things, he had learned how to breed races
scientifically.
      "This big-headed scientist, Mr. Yacub, began
preaching in the streets of Mecca, making such hosts of
converts that the authorities, increasingly concerned,
finally exiled him with 59,999 followers to the island
of Patmos - described in the Bible as the island where
John received the message contained in Revelations in
the New Testament.

      "Though he was a black man, Mr. Yacub,
embittered toward Allah now, decided, as revenge, to
create upon the earth a devil race - a bleached-out,
white race of people.
      "From his studies, Yacub knew that black men
contained two germs, black and brown.  Even though
the brown germ stayed dormant and was weaker than
the black germ, using the recessive genes structure
Yacub slowly achieved the bleached-out white race of
devils.  This race, Yacub knew, would be, as they
became lighter, and weaker, progressively also more
susceptible to wickedness and evil.
      "He set up a law on the island to kill all the
black babies and only to raise brown babies.  After two
hundred years on the island of Patmos all of the black
people vanished and only brown people remained.
After the next two hundred years only red people were
on the island.  Another two hundred years later, from
the red race, the yellow race was created.  Finally after
two hundred more years later, the white race had at
last been created.  These pale-skinned, savage,
cold-blue-eyed devils were nude and shameless.  They
were hairy, like animals, and they walked on all fours
and lived in trees.  Talk about degeneration of
mankind!
      "Six hundred more years later this white race
returned to the mainland to live among the natural
black people.  Within six months time, through telling
lies that set the black men fighting among each other,
this devil race had turned what had been a peaceful
heaven on earth into a hell torn by quarreling and
fighting.
      "But finally the original black people
recognized that their sudden troubles stemmed from
this devil white race that Mr. Yacub had made.  They
rounded them up and put them in chains.  With little
aprons to cover their nakedness, this devil race was
marched off across the Arabian desert to the caves of
Europe."
      I knew that this version of Original Man story
was as wrong as the Adam and Eve story, but not
because there was any kind of conclusive evidence
against it; in fact, if one thought about it, there were
probably more evidences that could back up this story
than refute this story.  It seemed wrong to me because
the future based on this version of the past simply did
not look promising.
      In my view a race that was born of unnatural
cause, a race that was made up artificially, could not
possibly inherit the earth.  They could not bear fruit.
For such a race, their only path in this time of Coming
Cosmic Fall time was total extinction of its race.  And
that was not an acceptable solution to me.  Yet, I could
understand that to any blacks in America, this theory
would strike a nerve center.  He or she might take a
day to react, a month, a year; he might never respond,
openly; but one thing I was sure - when he thought
about his own life, he would see where, to him,
personally, the white man sure had acted like a devil.
      Nevertheless, just as black and white could
never be the other, to me, the root of one could never
be the other.  They were fruits of different roots with
different cultural perspectives and historical time
frames.  Otherwise, neither one of them would have a
chance when the Cosmic Fall Time came.
      On the wall of my jail cell above the toilet there
was the following saying carved with a knife.  "Blacks
ain't born.  We be shitted.  That's why we be Black!"
      "Yeahp!  Yeahp!"  They would yell out to each
other with the same story over and over at about every
hour.  From their voice I could sense they were hurting
from the side effects of drug addiction withdrawal.
Their story was a way to take their minds off of the
craved drug intake.

      After finishing my lunch I conducted my daily
ritual of Tae-Ul-Ju chanting.  The soft yet reassuring
sound of Tae-Ul-Ju echoed in the cells.  "Hey who is
that?  Is that the Kung-Fu master?  Hey is that the
Kung-Fu idiot who were arrested with us yesterday?
Hey what are you doing?"
      Laughing I answered, "I am meditating."
      "Are you a monk," continued Ruddie.  "Hell, I
knew you were a Kung-Fu monk.  Hey, hey, hey jail-
monk, do that chanting shit again."  I did not feel like
performing for him so I did not respond to him.  I just
lay on my bunk bed, wondering what would happen
next.
      Noticing my lack of response, he started yelling
again, this time to the jailguard.  And this time I think
his cry for help was for real; "Hey, hey jailguard.  Let
me have one shot."  His voice pierced into my heart and
I felt I needed to help.  Then I started chanting
TaeUlJu again.  Ruddie's crying stopped.  "Hey, hey
jailmonk," Ruddie was laughing now, "that sounds real
good."  I chanted for about ten minutes and I could
hear Ruddie mimicking the chant.  "Hey this is good.
Hey, Frankie, try this.  Hey, jailhouse monk, can you
slow it down so I can copy you?  What are you saying
there, Humchi, humha what, chunsang wonga bong-ga
and what?"
      I laughed.  "All right, I will teach you the
words.  Repeat after me, O.K?"
      "All right,"  yelled out Ruddie.  We slowly
chanted for about ten minutes together.  "Hey, I like
this jailhouse monk.  Did you like this, Frankie?"
      Frankie answered, "I don't know, Ruddie.  I
think you're going crazy in here jail, Ruddie.  What the
hell does it mean - Humchi, Humchi."
      Then Ruddie yelled at me, "Yeah, jailhouse
monk, what does it mean to say Humchi, Humchi?"
      I thought about it for a minute and answered,
"It means I desire to find my root.  It means I desire to
seek my origin.  It is the sound of humanity suckling
on the breasts of mother earth."  "What?"  said Ruddie
laughing, "You're crazier than I am.  Fuck, we gotta get
high together when we get out.  I wanna get high with
you, man."  That afternoon, at every thirty minutes he
called out to me and we chanted TaeUlJu together.
      In the early evening people came into my cell.
It seemed my cell was for small time offenders who
were scheduled to go out the next day.  Ruddie still
called out to me, but this time I told him to try
chanting by himself.  His hoarse sound of TaeUlJu
reading echoed the jail walls.
      I felt satisfied that I had taught him the chant.
Even after dinner Ruddie kept on chanting TaeUlJu,
yelling out to Frankie to join him.  But Frankie would
have nothing to do with it; yet I think Rudie's
chanting relieved Frankie's addiction withdrawal pain
because Frankie stopped yelling as well.  Sometimes I
read with Ruddie but most of the time Ruddie went
about himself, "Humching".  I think the guards figured
that the chanting was better than yelling and left him
alone to chant all night long if that was what he
wanted.
      It was around two a.m.  The sporadic sound of
Ruddie's TaeUlJu chanting calmed down.  I had
thought Ruddie went to sleep.  Lying on my bunk bed,
I tried to get some sleep myself.  But whenever I closed
my eyes, a bright light came towards me and I would
open my eyes, startled.  I could hear the mumbling of
the guy lying on the bunk bed above me.  "That
fucking bitch betrayed me.  How could she run away
with him?  I'm gonna shoot that no good two bit pimp,
man.  I swear I will."  I thought he was sobbing.
      The jail cell turned dark blue.  Yellow trees
grew all around me.  My shoulder itched.  I got up and
took my shirt off.  I could hear a drum beat emanating
from the next cell.  "Dum, Dum, dum, DuDum, Dum,
Dum," it said repeatedly, "Dum, Dum, Dum, DuDum,
Dum, Dum." A tall black youth walked over to me.  He
had a huge grin on his face.  I noticed enormous purple
wings growing out from his shoulders.  "Hey, jail
monk!"  He slapped my shoulder.  "I'm Ruddie."  He
extended his right hand towards me.
      We shook hands.  "I am Kan," I said.  He flew up
and I flew with him.  I realized I had a pair of big
green wings stretching out from my shoulders.  As we
flew up, the trees grew taller.  The yellow trees pierced
the clouds and stretched their shadows into the full
moon on the eastern horizon.  We flew into the moon.
We flew towards the drum beat.  It pulsated repeatedly,
"Dum, Dum, Dum, DuDum, Dum, Dum."  I answered
with the TaeUlJu Song of Life and Ruddie joined me.
Finally we came to the edge of the forest and we
landed on the highest branch of the yellow tree.  In
front we were able to see a calm pond extending into a
golden wide open field.  I noticed Ruddie no longer
had wings on his shoulder.  I checked my shoulder and
my wings were also gone.  "Jump," said the drum beat.
"Jump, Jump, Jump, JumJump, Jump, Jump," said the
drum beat.  I looked into Ruddie's eyes with a smile
and we both shook our heads.  Holding hands, we
jumped.  While jumping we passed by our dark blue
cell blocks.  The mexican man who was lying above my
bunkbed was still sobbing.  We kept falling.  My
stomach floated upwards and was pushing on my lung.
I could hardly breathe.  The moon that was floating in
the pond started to float upwards.  It rose like a slow-
rising balloon.
      The moon caught us before we could hit the
pond.  On the floating moon there was a tall black man
standing above and staring down at our fallen bodies.
His dark shape radiated a golden glow.  We both stood
up and bowed at his presence and he bowed with us.
The moon landed at a village.  "Come with me,"  the
proud black man said.  We followed him quietly.  We
came to an enclosed courtyard surrounded by
thatched-hut houses.  Goats and small children were
running around.  In front of us to the left sat a man
beating his drum.  Beyond him there were about thirty
black men standing in a row on each side, facing each
other.  At the center stood a towering chair covered
with a lion skin and decorated with ostrich feathers.
The black man who took us here sat on the seat.
      The drum beat stopped. The men all bowed with
us.  The black man sitting on the chair spoke in Fanti.
"Welcome!  You are at the home of an Aflao tribe," his
voice roared.  "Thank you for bringing one of our sons
to us," the chief said to me.  "Come to me," said the
chief to Ruddie.  Ruddie walked up to him like a
proud soldier with sure footsteps.  Upon Ruddie's
approach, the chief stood up and embraced him.  The
chief sat on his chair and Ruddie kneeled in front of
him.
      "I am your ancestor," said the chief.  His voice
was trembling.  "I have only one thing to tell you, my
child," he said.  "Our days shall surely come.  It is as
certain as the sun and the moon.  It is as certain as I
am your ancestor.  Yet, my child, it is only you who
can bring about the promised time.  It is only you who
can take us back home.  Along with the lost children of
Africans in America, we are all lost in our African
continent.  The days must come when our lost children
come home.  The days must come when their bleached
hearts become as Black as mine.  Do not mix blood, my
children.  Do not bleach your heart with mixed blood.
Greet the blackest brides, my sons.  Welcome the Black
heart into your souls, my sons.  Let the Black blood
flow into your veins, my sons!  Be culture, my sons.  Be
black, my sons!"  Turning to me, the chief stared into
my eyes and with a full force roared into the air, "Let
Black be Black!  Yellow sons greet yellow brides.
White sons greet white brides.  Red sons greet red
brides.  And my black sons shall greet black brides!
Come home, my black sons!  When you come home, we
shall be returning home.  We are watching you, my
Black children!"
      The familiar bell woke me up.  Names were
called and people lined up in front of the cell gate to
be let out.  They would be taken in a bus to be
transported to a nearby courthouse.  "Hey, Jail monk!
Hey Kan, Hey Kan!  Your name is Kan, right?"
Ruddie shouted at me.
      "Yeah, how did you know my name?" I asked.
      "Hey, jail monk, I had the weirdest dream last
night, man.  And it was more real than real, man.  Hey,
Kan!  Your name is Kan, right?"  He shouted at me
again.
      "Yes!" I shouted back.
      "Hey Kan, we have to sing the TaeUlJu Song of
Life, man.  We have to chant TaeUlJu.  Last night I
saw things you wouldn't believe.  And you were there
too.  Imagine that.  Fuck, I am coming home, man.
Kan, that's what that chief man told me.  Do you catch
what I am saying?  He said, our days will come.  He
said when that day comes, I can say to fucking white
racists, I judge you man.  I judge you for your crimes
on me.   Hey Kan, tell me more about this TaeUlJu.
Tell me more about JeungSan Do."
      I told him that his parents were living Gods
mightier and greater than Jesus or Allah could ever be.
"Shit, man.  You mean my old man?  Hell, man, he's a
fucking janitor."
      "Yes, I mean your father who is a janitor!"  I
said with a full force and conviction that I did not
think I had within me.

      That afternoon a sheriff went by my cell and
told me that I was free to go.  I told Rudie to keep
chanting TaeUlJu and one day when he is out we will
do TaeUlJu together.  I told him I was leaving for
Korea to find out whether the dream he had last night
was for real or not.  And when I come back I told him I
shall look for him and we shall do TaeUlJu together.
      I gathered my belongings at the front desk and
walked out the police station.  I felt weary.  It was a
bright sunny day; yet I felt something was missing in
the air.  I walked around couple of blocks without
much thought.  Then I stopped and stared into a poster
plastered on a telephone pole.  It announced that the
end of the world was coming.  It announced that Jesus
was soon coming down from heaven for the judgement
day.  I thought, 'Yes, the Cosmic Fall Time is almost
upon us.'
      I hitched a ride to a nearby beach.  A long
stretch of gleaming white sand was dotted by
occasional joggers.  The night was coming and the
glowing red sun was about to fall into the Pacific
ocean only to rise above the Korean sea.  This was the
end of the road for me in the U.S.  A new journey
awaited me in Korea.  "No, it's not the end of the
world that is coming.  It's a New Beginning."  I said to
myself.  I sat on the beach and looking into the sun in
the ocean, I chanted TaeUlJu.
Chapter 15  Visit to JeungSanDo Temple


      The JeungSan Do Temple was located on the
third floor of a newly constructed building in Mapo
town of Seoul city.  The building was located right
next to where my old Mapo junior high school used to
be before it had been moved.  Feeling my heart
trembling, I walked up the stairs.  Opening the door I
could hear the chanting sound of TaeUlJu gently
flowing out.  After taking off my shoes and placing
them in a shoe box, I walked inside on the clean floor.
A boy who barely looked sixteen years of age received
me.  He bowed at me and I bowed with him.  We both
sat cross-legged on the floor.  His back was straight
and his eyes gleamed with wisdom.  He showed a
genuine interest in my search for the Truth.  He did
not ask me many questions; it seemed he knew why I
had arrived.  With a sincere eagerness, he began to
explain to me the essence of JeungSan Do.
      "As we approach a new millennium, there have
been many new religious movements as well as
revitalization movements of old religions."  He spoke
without shaking his stature.  His body remained firmly
planted on the floor,  and his back stood from this
sitting posture like a tree with a firm root.  "However,
the problem with revitalizing old religions is that their
divinities no longer reflect the needs of our changing
time.  The problem with the many new religious
movements replacing old religions is that most new
religions fail to define a New Image of Divinity in
place of old divinities.  JeungSan Do is unique because
it is the New Spiritual Religion that places order in the
world of divinities.
      "JeungSan Do was founded in 1911 by a woman
called the TaeMo Go SuBuNim.  The Ultimate Divinity
of JeungSan Do is Her Husband Jeung San Kang.  He
was born in Korea in 1871 and died in 1909.

      The young boy's voice sounded like a gentle
stream flowing down in the morning dew.
Emphasizing the word 'TaeMo Go', he gave me a brief
background information on JeungSan Do.

The Divinity

      "JeungSan Do was founded in 1911 by a woman,
the TaeMo Go SuBuNim.  The Ultimate Divinity of
JeungSan Do is Her Husband Jeung San Kang.  He is
the Supreme Ruling Divinity of Heaven, Earth and
Men.  He said that he had sent Jesus, Buddha,
Confucius and other Saints to educate humanity.
However, despite numerous teachings, riding the tide
of scientific achievement, humanity tried to conquer
the laws of nature.  Thus all major divinities, saints
and spirits went up to the Ninth Heaven with Matteo
Ricci priest as their leader and gathered in front of
the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim.  They asked Him to be
finally born as a human child in order to solve the
problem.
      "As a Person, JeungSan SangJeNim defined the
current problem of Earth and Heaven in the
unchanging role of divinities.  Thus as a Human, He
restructured the Heavenly Order.  He replaced Jesus
with Matteo Ricci as the ruling divinity of
Christianity.  He replaced Buddha with Mook Jin as
the ruling divinity of Buddhism and so on.  After
restructuring the Heavenly Order, He constructed the
Heavenly Government that shall oversee unifying all
different religions among different cultures.  After
completing this Deed, He died, leaving the actual work
of constructing a Unified Religion on earth to the
Coming Humanity.

The Cosmology

      "Just as there is one year on earth, there is one
year in the Cosmos.  The Cosmic year is equivalent to
129,600 earthly years.  There is Cosmic Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter.  Thus every 100,000 years or
so, the Ice Age comes.  The current humanity of Homo
Sapiens Sapiens was born on earth this Cosmic Spring
time about 50,000 years ago.
      "Right now we live in a period of Changing
Time.  We are at the end of the Cosmic Summer time
about to embark into the Cosmic Fall time.  During the
Cosmic Spring and Summer time, the Yang (male)
energy dominated.  However, when the Cosmic Fall
time comes there shall be equality in the Yim (female
energy) and Yang relationship.  Thus a woman, His
Wife the TaeMo Go SuBuNim heads the JeungSan Do
religion.
      "Because the Yang energy dominates during the
Cosmic Spring and Summer time, the earth's axis is
leaning toward the Yang direction, right now by 23.5
degrees."  He tilted his head to the right then brought
it back up.  "When the Cosmic Fall Time comes the axis
shall stand upright, creating the environment of equal
Yim and Yang.  The earth shall circle the sun in a
perfect 360 degree circle bringing about 360 days in a
year.  During the Cosmic Spring Time there were 375
days in a year.  When the Cosmic Summer time came,
the axis shifted and now we have 365 days in a year.
The shifting of the axis had brought about the sinking
of the Atlantis and Mu continents.  This time the
shifting of the axis shall create a perfect balance;
giving fifty percent land and fifty percent ocean.
There shall be some land that shall sink as well as some
land that shall rise."  He spoke on without any
hesitation.

The History

      "JeungSan Do gained seven million followers
out of the total Korean population of twenty million
during the lifetime of the TaeMo Go SuBuNim.
However, because it was during the Japanese
occupation of Korea, JeungSan Do followers were
persecuted under the Japanese attempt to plant its own
Japanese religion, shintoism, in Korea.  By the end of
World War II, the JeungSan Do movement lost its
momentum when the TaeMo Go SuBuNim died.  The
Japanese passed a special law to outlaw JeungSan Do
and it went underground.
      "After Korea gained its independence, JeungSan
Do was newly revitalized under the leadership of the
Great Supreme Teacher WoonSan Ahn.  However, in its
attempt to modernize, Korea welcomed Christianity
with an open arm.  The claims of JeungSan Do was
brushed aside as superstition.  Even though there were
300,000 followers under the leadership of the Supreme
Teacher, he decided that the time was not ripe yet.
When the Korean war broke out, he declared a
temporary rest period and went into seclusion.
      "In 1974 the Great Supreme Teacher WoonSan
Ahn decided that finally the time was right for the
third and final attempt at constructing the Unified
Religion of the Coming Cosmic Fall time.
      "At first, he created a new religious category
called Korean Religion and positioned JeungSan Do in
opposition to all other religions which were imported.
He positioned JeungSan Do as the leading religion
within that category.  And JeungSan Do soon gained
wide acceptance among college students in Korea.
Currently there are JeungSan Do clubs in every college
campus in Korea.
      "Second, he repositioned all other fundamental
religions along the Heavenly Order constructed by the
JeungSan SangJeNim.  Before 1974 JeungSan Do was
called JeungSan Gyo  - JeungSan Religion.  However, it
was renamed JeungSan Do - The JeungSan Way.  And
JeungSan Do was redefined as meaning the Final Fruit
of all previous religions.  The position of The Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim being the Man of the Highest
Supreme Ruling Lord God, was emphasized and a New
Religious category was defined along the line of the
Coming Cosmic Fall Time.  All fundamental religions
and their leaders were placed under JeungSan Do
according to their importance in the Newly
constructed United Federation of Heavenly
Government following the JeungSan SangJeNim's
Rulings.  JeungSan Do slowly gained acceptance among
the newly emerging Korean middle class.
      "Third, JeungSan Do is currently reaching out
to become the Global Religion that is culture-specific
as it was meant to be in the first place.  First, JeungSan
Do was offered as the leading Korean Religion to
Koreans living in Manchuria, Siberia and China.
Manchuria, part of Siberia and part of China, will
become part of the Korean Nation when the Cosmic
Fall time comes because they were Korean territories
to begin with and the majority of people living there
are still Koreans.  Second, JeungSan Do is to be
propagated globally.  We are preparing to publish
English, Chinese and Japanese version of The Truth of
JeungSan Do book.  It is our aim to let every living soul
on earth and in heaven learn of the Coming Cosmic
Fall Time and of the deeds of the JeungSan SangJeNim
as a human being on earth.  It is the purpose of
JeungSan Do to lay bear the Truth concerning the root
of all cultures in order to preserve all deities and
spirits of the people.  However, at the same time you
must understand that it is not the aim of JeungSan Do
to convert every living person on earth to JeungSan Do
before the Cosmic Fall Time comes.  We only need a
selected few people to prepare for the Coming Cosmic
Fall Time.  The JeungSan SangJeNim had mentioned of
twelve thousand highly attained souls as His leading
workers on earth.  When the Cosmic Fall Time comes
everyone shall be followers of JeungSan Do naturally.
Yet before the Fall Time comes, we need to act out the
JeungSan SangJeNim's plans and those selected few
people have been sent from the Heaven and are still
trying to meet JeungSan Do on this earth, even today."
He seemed to be asking whether I was the very one
looking for such a truth.
      "JeungSan Do is the Answer for today's
spiritual problems.  It is the most Natural and
Wholesome Religion - the way Nature intended
religions to become.  All other fundamental religions
had served their purposes.  They shall be repositioned
along the Heavenly Order of Divinity constructed by
the Supreme Lord JeungSan SangJeNim.
      "JeungSan Do is the final fruit of all religions -
the way the nature intended every religion to become.
JeungSan Do is the final fruit that shall be harvested
when the Cosmic Fall time comes."
      Listening to his words, I felt my heart warming.
I have come home at last!  On the front wall of the
JeungSan DoJang (JeungSan Do Place), there were
picture shrines of JeungSan SangJeNim, TaeMo Go
SuBuNim and Korean ancestor DanGun SungJoNim
(Holy Ancestor).  We lit candles, burned incenses and
offered purified water in worship earns for them.  We
bowed four times in Ban-Chun-Mu-Ji style, the
traditional Korean bowing style of firmly upholding
the Heaven while gently stroking the Earth.  After
bowing, I prayed to JeungSan SangJeNim.  I repeated
the prayer that I saw in The Truth of JeungSan Do book.


Prayer from the Heart

JeungSan SangJeNim!
You are the ever Renewing God, the Maitreya,
the Ruler of Earth and Heaven
who have incarnated into this human world
from the Heavenly Throne
in order to open the Coming New Age of Peace and Harmony.
TaeMoNim!
You are the mother of all life on Earth and Heaven
in this time of New Beginning.

I wish to be a righteous and sincere JeungSan Do Worker.
Please forgive sins and misdeeds of my previous lives.
I repent sins and misdeeds of this life.
Free me from the wrath of vengeful spirits and evil intentions.
Let our forefathers rest in peace by fulfilling their wishes.
And show my ancestors and descendants
to the New Path of the Coming Justice.

After the period of hardships and relief,
the impending time of disaster is near at hand.
I will save my parents, brothers and sisters.
I will stand firmly above an unyielding faith
through the utmost devotions and respects.
Following the Law of Returning to the Origin
I will meditate with a single will the life-giving Truth
that unifies the role of Sovereign, Master and Father.
I will save the suffering mankind and lead them
to the coming fifty thousand years of the Cosmic Fall Time.
May your Holy Grace shine upon my path
toward the Truth of JeungSanDo.


      There was an unavoidable strength and warmth
in the prayer.  My body was overwhelmed with warmth
and tears fell down my cheeks.  My reason for living
and my reason for dying was answered in that boy's
brief introduction.  We chanted TaeUlJu together
twenty-one times.  When I opened my eyes, the
handsome looking portrait of JeungSan SangJeNim
smiled broadly.

      The next day was Sunday and I was invited to
partake in JeungSan Do's weekly Ritual.  I was also
told that the Master Teacher was going to lecture that
day.

Chapter 16  Lecture on the Coming Cosmic Fall Time
by the Master Teacher


      It was a bright sunny day and the JeungSan Do
Temple hall was packed with young college students.
With some timidity I sat at the end of the hall.  Soon
with the sound of a bright bell, the weekly Sunday
ritual began.  The holy waters for JeungSan
SangJeNim, the TaeMo Go SuBuNim and for all other
ancestral and local deities were opened.  We bowed
four times and chanted TaeUlJu twenty-one times.
The strong sound of TaeUlJu echoed from the Temple
hall into the busy streets of Seoul.  There was a strong
sense of fulfillment arising in me.  After the ritual the
Master Teacher gave us a lecture on the Coming
Cosmic Fall Time.  I had seen the Master Teacher,
KyungJeon Ahn, at the Ninth Heaven hall before.
When he walked in to give the lecture, we all bowed to
him.
      He was tall and slender.  He wore a white suit.
His youthful face radiated a powerful sense of truth in
the hall.  Holding his copy of The Truth of JeungSan
Do, he asked us to repeat the following passage of the
JeungSan SangJeNim's Saying.

      *     "The nature of Heaven and Earth gives
      Birth in the Spring and then gives Death in the
      Fall"  (p.433).

      The lively youths in the hall repeated after him.
And I joined them.  Briefly, my eyes met the Master
Teacher's eyes.  They gently shook my mind.  His eyes
shone brightly.  He seemed to be looking at everyone in
the hall but his eyes never left me.  Following is the
summary of his lecture and the Sayings of the
JeungSan SangJeNim, which the Master Teacher
instructed the students to remember.

      "The current humanity is living at the edge of
Changing Period.  The law of Heaven and Earth gives
life at the Cosmic Spring Time, but kills in judgment
at the Cosmic Fall Time.  Only through the Cycle of
Death, Humanity matures.  Death gives awareness to
Life.  Death gives meaning to the spirits within Life.
Facing Death, humanity prepares for Life.  As we
approach the end of the Cosmic Summer Time, our
humanity has forgotten its place within the time frame
of the cosmic structure.  It is only since Einstein that
science became aware of time dimension within life;
but it still does not recognize time dimension within
death.  The recent development of Superstring theory
in physics opens up the possibility of a ten-dimensional
universe.
      "The opening of Cosmic Fall time not only gives
death to out physical world but it also gives death to
the spiritual world.  Today humanity has forgotten its
root.  Humanity has forgotten its proper perspective in
the time and space structure of our universe.

      *     "The JeungSan SangJeNim has stated,
      'Those who study I-Ching claim that the change
      in earth's axis will come.  Yet they do not know
      that I have changed the structure of Heaven
      and Earth' "  (p.434).

      "From these words of His we must understand
the nature of our universe and how within this
boundary the JeungSan SangJeNim changed the
structure of Heaven and Earth to prepare the
humanity for the Coming Cosmic Fall Time.
      "First, we need to understand that the shift in
the axis of Heaven and Earth is a natural phenomenon
that occurs as a result of the nature of our universe.
Even the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim works within this
boundary.  It is according to the law of nature that
Spring, Summer, Fall and Winter come.  Yet, because
there are spirits that control the movement to bring
about specific structures in Heaven and Earth, by
restructuring the spiritual world the JeungSan
SangJeNim provides Justice on earth when the Cosmic
Fall Time comes.  The JeungSan SangJeNim does this
because he finally gained insight into the human mind.
      "Second, we need to understand that the law of
nature by itself does not discriminate the bad from the
good.  The shifting of earth's axis is not an
independent movement.  All planets on our solar
system shall be uplifted from their present elliptical
course.  All at the same time, their axes shall stand
upright.  All planets shall circle the sun in a 360 degree
circle.  Due to this sudden shock, earth's surface will
undergo a tremendous change, causing earthquakes,
volcano eruptions, hail, tornadoes, flood and fire.
Such a disaster does not fall upon only on a bad person.
Whether you were good or not if you were caught in
such a situation, you cannot survive.  The Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim restructured the spiritual order
so it is not such disasters that shall decide the fate of
humanity.  The Lord JeungSan SangJeNim restructured
the order of the spiritual world and gave the humanity
the knowledge of the Cosmic season.  Thus even though
many people shall die in such disasters, the Final
Judgment shall be conducted in the hands of current
humanity.

      *     "The Lord JeungSan has stated that
      when the Cosmic Fall Time comes upon, 'The
      East shall be consumed by fire.  The West shall
      be flooded with water.  When the world gets
      engulfed by fire, mountains and fields shall be
      in flames.  Even though you value your child,
      there shall not be enough time to pull him out
      from the engulfing fire' "  (p.438).

      "The nature of earth is such that earth takes in
all power of creation and gives birth.  It is the only
place on our universe with such a gift.  It is the Gon
(birth) place.  Thus in the state of attainment (Do) we
can say earth is an entity with a living soul.  The main
source of life for earth is water.  The vast ocean and
rivers are blood and energy of mother earth.  Water
breeds all life on earth.  The JeungSan SangJeNim
conducted the necessary ritual to correct the balance
of Yim and Yang.  When Heaven and Earth shake with
sudden rupturing Bang, the prospect of peace and
unification opens up.  Justice shall provide order with
opening up of the water energy and rising up of earth's
natural tendency specifically suitable to their region.

      *     "JeungSan SangJeNim has stated, 'When
      the time of Final Judgment comes, a sudden
      epidemic of an unknown Disease shall occur
      worldwide.  Those who were asleep shall die in
      their sleep.  Those who were sitting down shall
      not have time to move upright before death
      comes upon them.  Those who were walking to a
      destination shall die on the road.  Yet even
      under such circumstances, those who call upon
      my name shall receive life again' "  (p.439).

      "This disease shall sweep the world for three
years and medical community will not have time to
study the Cure.  Only UiTong (the Medicine of the
Lord JeungSan SangJeNim) shall bring about life to
humanity.  Only after our humanity have overcome
this Disease, Justice shall prevail.  The origin of all
diseases are from our minds.  Thus The Lord JeungSan
SangJeNim had decided to use the Disease as His final
weapon to decide upon the fate of our humanity.

      *     "This is the time of the spirits.  Do not
      commit sins.  When the New Age opens, spirits
      shall come down from Heaven with fire swords
      and demand punishment.  You shall lose all
      your senses"  (p.439).

      "When the Heavenly soldiers take away the soul,
people shall die of a mysterious disease without
knowing why.

      *     "I have put the East and the West on a
      contest in order to even out.  Yet because the
      difference in wealth is too pronounced, I decide
      the final outcome through the Final Disease"
      (p.440).

      *     "During the Cosmic Summer Time, power
      and might decided wealth, thus this became the
      cause of all conflicts.  Yet, no matter how good
      something is, if it has no use, it has to be
      thrown out.  Even if something is of poor
      quality, if there is a use for it, then it shall be
      taken.  Since the magnitude of power and
      cruelty of the weapons from this world shall
      find no match even in the future, all wars shall
      cease in the future.  Thus do not seek answers
      in war strategies or weaponry.  Even if it is
      only small and meager, know the way of the
      Cure.  If you save many people, you shall earn
      enduring prosperity"  (p.441).

      "Currently, the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim is
recruiting His workers on earth to teach His Cure.
Those with great potential had already been sent from
Heaven to earth to be born.  Now it is up to each
individual on earth to be awakened to the Cosmic
Season and learn of the new structure in the ordering
of the spiritual world.
      "Because the destructive power of nuclear
weapons proved to be too enormous to decide winners,
the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim prevented nuclear wars.
All nuclear weapons of today shall not find use and
will end up being nuclear waste.  When the Judgment
of the Cosmic Fall Time brings about the Spirit
Warriors who shall take away souls from people, The
Lord JeungSan SangJeNim warned us to know the
Cure.  Even the small and meager way to entangle
conflicts and to bring about Justice shall be taken and
used over useless weaponry.

      *     "Now the order of Heaven and Earth has
      been reorganized.  When the proper time comes,
      each order shall surface at its proper time.  Also
      I shall let the way of the spiritual Justice to
      creep in and out of the people's stomachs in
      order to correct the personality and physical
      traits in order to use them.  This is because even
      a stick can have use if properly applied.  Let
      the poor, low-life, dumb and weak ones be
      comfortable.  Be careful of the sins arising from
      your mind, mouth and will.  And do not stir the
      thought of angry revenge on others.  Rich,
      precious, wise and strong ones shall all be
      accused of unjust conducts and will be
      overthrown from their positions.  Those who are
      full of old and established thoughts cannot
      easily be part of the coming Cosmic New Age.
      The households of the wealthy are overflowing
      with fates of disasters and death"  (p.442).

      "In order to understand His Cure, one must
understand the proper relationship between the
spiritual world and our earthly world.  The SangJeNim
left His Marking on earth to be recognized by His
Spirit Warriors in Heaven.

      *     "One day The Lord JeungSan took a
      book with thirty blank papers and on the first
      fifteen papers he wrote 'Those who betray Eun
      (thankfulness, receiving) shall die a million
      death.  From a single Yang, Life begins.'  On
      the other fifteen papers he wrote 'Holy is the
      fix and might is the medicine.'  Taking
      KyungMyunJuSa-powder (red powder which is
      known to have the power to communicate with
      the spirits) and wrapping cloth, He told
      KwangChan, 'Your answer shall decide the way
      to life and death.'  KwangChan answered,
      'Those who deny or abandon their ancestor
      spirits shall find it difficult to live in the
      Coming Cosmic Age.'  After pondering for a
      while The Lord JeungSan said, 'You are
      Correct.'  After wrapping papers with the
      wrapping cloth, he put KyungMyunJuSa-
      powder on the cloth and stamped on each paper
      of the book and said 'This is my Mark' "
      (p.443).

      "In order to receive His Cure, His workers must
have following qualities.  First, His workers must
respect and honor their teachers.

      *     "During the Cosmic Summer Time, there
      were those who betrayed their teachers.
      However, from now on all such people shall be
      Judged into extinction"  (p.443).

      "Second, His workers must be susceptible to new
ideas that can truly save the humanity.

      *     "People say 'Southern Chosen People'
      (Original name of Korea was Chosen), this
      means 'the remaining Chosen people'.  Those
      who are not corrupted by old religions from the
      East and the West are my chosen people.  Teach
      them well"  (p.443-444).

      "Third, His workers must be humble.  Those
who have lost the purity of faith and became arrogant
with old knowledge shall be difficult to receive the
new knowledge of the Coming Cosmic Fall Time.

      *     "Arrogant ones shall fail.  Use someone
      else"  (p.445).

      "Fourth, His workers must be pure at heart with
a strong desire to better the world.

      *     "It is better off not knowing the future.
      Those who know the Coming Time shall be
      filled with sorrow thinking of what shall
      happen to our humanity.  Now all humanity is
      about to be extinct, yet people are only thinking
      of today's profits"  (p.447).

      "Fifth, His workers must have a clear sense of
equality and justice.  We now live in time of test.  We
shall find out how evil or how good human nature
really is.  This is the Final Test on the will of
humanity before we enter the Cosmic Fall Time and
build a truly humane civilization on earth.  Yet
humanity is soaking with crime.  There is no clear
vision of tomorrow and we waste our wealth today.

      *     "Now it is wish-fulfilling time.  I abolish
      all previous social rules regarding the position
      of women and men and allow each to do
      whatever they wish.  However, when the New
      Time comes, I shall bring forth New equal
      Yim-Yang Rituals"  (p.447).

      "Sixth, His workers must be gentle at heart,
being sympathetic towards other's shortcomings; yet at
the same time they must learn to be objective in their
judgments.

      *     "One day Lord JeungSan turning toward
      a wall lying on his side suddenly cried out in
      deep sadness, 'All humanity is about to die, yet
      I cannot save all of them no matter what I do.'
      He wept in grief"  (p.448).

      "What does it mean to die in this time of
Change?  What does it mean to be Judged in this time
of Change?  Many people say, 'So what?  What's wrong
with dying when most people die?'  Death in this time
of Coming Cosmic Fall means termination of all
activities of the Cosmic Summer Time.  Thus both body
and soul of those who do not bear fruit fades away
forever.  It is the Final Death which concludes all
Karma activities of the Cosmic Summer Time.  Life or
Death in this time of Coming Cosmic Fall Time is the
Final Judgment on all our successive states of our
existences.  Death of an individual not only concludes
the person's numerous stages of lives but it also ends
lives of all ancestors of that person. To live in the
Coming Cosmic Fall Time not only signifies attainment
of Life for that individual - it also means to bear the
Final Fruit for the roots of one's ancestors.
      "The Coming Cosmic Fall Time not only brings
harvest for an individual, but it also justifies the long
efforts of one's ancestors that finally bore that Final
Fruit.  Thus the main Savior is only I.  My life or death
Judges the final outcome of all of my previous lives
and my life or death determines the final outcome of
all of my ancestors' long efforts.

      "Seventh, His workers must identify and teach
at least six other JeungSan Do workers.

      *     "I shall make the world peaceful.  And
      my workers shall rule that world in peace.  It
      shall be the result of fifty years of efforts.  All
      my workers shall propagate my words to six
      other workers"  (p.457).

      "Eighth, His workers must be pure at heart with
a Single Will toward Justice.

      *     "One day after marking twenty-four
      directions on a paper, the JeungSan SangJeNim
      wrote, 'The Saints with a single will to Justice'
      at the center and said 'people say our universe
      started from one place and expanded to all
      directions.  However, that is not true.  The
      universe established itself in all twenty-four
      directions at one moment' "  (p.459).  (Not one
      Big Bang from one spot.  But multitude of Big
      Bangs in twenty-four places.)

      *     "This is the work of rowing the Ark of
      South Korea (Chosen).  'All Saints with a Single
      Will to Justice' are rowing this Ark and
      MyungSuk Chun is the Leader (Do Sa Gong).
      Now I ask these Saints how they got the respect
      that they deserve and they all say it is in their
      'Single Will'.  Thus only with a Single Will shall
      aboard this ark of salvation"  (p.459).

      "Ninth, His workers must have the complete
knowledge of the Cure.  Such a knowledge will be
given to them when they had met all other qualities.

      *     "In a game of chess, you need only be
      one step ahead of the opponent to win; thus
      study the subjects that others do not know.
      Now even if the most brilliant strategists fly in
      multitude, people will not recognize them.
      Since the opening of this Cosmic Year, flood,
      draught, and Wars engulfed the world.  But
      there has been no worldwide scale of Disease
      yet.  Later there shall come a time when an
      unknown Disease shall engulf the humanity.
      Men and Women shall die and the medical
      community shall not be able to find the Cure.
      Abandon all fashionable and exotic
      aphrodisiacs and know the Cure (UyTong).
      Now I have prevented all large scale natural
      and human disasters from erupting.  Yet I leave
      this Final attack of Judgment Disease
      (ByungGub) to burst and give my workers the
      Cure (UyTong).  Do not seek exotic medicine
      from afar.  Know the Cure (UyTong) with a
      Pure Heart.  The Final Disease shall come upon
      humanity like the flood"  (p.461).Chapter 17  My Spiritual Birthday


      I woke up at three in the morning; I would have
to wait another four or five hours for the sun to rise.
The night before I had arrived at TaeJeon City, where
the Head Temple was located.  I stayed at a nearby
motel that night.  Like a child anticipating birthday
gifts, I woke up at three in the morning and washed
myself thoroughly - TaeJeon City is famous for its hot
mineral bath waters from underground.
      That day was Dong-Ji, the day when the night
was longest in the year.  Dong-Ji marked the end of
one period and the beginning of another.  Dong-Ji was
one of the four major celebrated Ritual days of
JeungSan Do, along with the birthday  of JeungSan
SangJeNim, the birthday of the TaeMo Go SuBuNim,
and the deathday of JeungSan SangJeNim.  Today also
marked a new beginning for me as well.  Today was
going to be my spiritual birthday.  Today I was going
to be initiated into JeungSan Do.  Finally I was about
to be officially recognized as a JeungSan Do worker.
      The stars were out lighting the streets.  The
night was cold, yet my heart was warm.  From the
motel I walked to the Head JeungSan Do Temple.
When I arrived at around four a.m., fellow JeungSan
Do workers were cleaning the Temple.  I joined them.
We changed the purified water.  At around five a.m.
we started JeungSan Do TaeUlJu Chanting meditation.
The sound of TaeUlJu echoed in the morning mist.
      We must have chanted for three to four hours.  I
sensed the light dawning.  By now multitude of people
gathered at the outside courtyard.  Our chanting sound
rang through the morning air, brightening the world
with its ray of reigning sound.  At about ten a.m. a
thick crowd of people  gathered outside, stretching
beyond the village pathways leading to the Head
Temple and onto the Avenue that went across the heart
of the TaeJeon City.  Our chanting sound entered
every household in the neighborhood, announcing the
dawn of the morning after the Dong-Ji day, the longest
and the darkest night.  The whole neighborhood where
the JeungSan Do Head Temple was located now joined
us and rejoiced with us in reading the TaeUlJu Song of
Life in their new morning awakening.  Some people
were sitting on their balcony and others were sitting in
their courtyards chanting the TaeUlJu song of Life
with us.
      Now fellow JeungSan Do workers brought in
food and set it on the Ritual table.  A group of people
dressed in traditional Korean white robes walked into
the Temple and sat at the front, facing our Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim's portrait.
      With the sound of a gentle bell today's official
ritual began.  We all stood up, and following the
announcement of a commencer we bowed four times in
Ban-Chun-Mu-Ji style, upholding the Heavenly Season
and caressing the Earthly Nature.  After the fourth
bowing, I prayed to JeungSan SangJeNim, thanking our
Great Supreme Teacher and Master Teacher for
leading me to SangJeNim.  I announced to SangJeNim
that I shall uphold his words and save the current
humanity from self destruction and lead them into the
Coming Cosmic Fall Time.
      We chanted TaeUlJu twenty-one times in
unison.  Then we offered food and rice-wine to
JeungSan SangJeNim.  Three people went out in front
of each ritual table.  With the offering of rice-wine
one person opened the cover of rice dish and pierced
rice spoon into the rice.  He struck the chopsticks three
times on an empty dish.  It was just like the ancestor
ritual our family used to perform.  Then we bowed
four times again.  We did as such two more times and
we read TaeUlJu  twenty-one times together in unison
after offering rice wine and food.
      After the Dong-Ji ritual I officially pronounced
my enrollment as a worker of JeungSan Do.  I went our
in front of the ritual table and offered the rice wine to
JeungSan SangJeNim.  My heart was pounding, almost
causing me to spill the wine in the process.  After the
offering I solemnly declared to SangJeNim and to all
spirits in Heaven and to all humankind on earth that
as a JeungSan Do Worker I shall place my one will in
SangJeNim's heart and teach the humanity to prepare
for the Coming Cosmic Fall Harvest.
      After the Ritual we all ate Dong-Ji Porridge
and drank the rice wine.  It was already late in the
afternoon.  My fellow JeungSan Do workers
congratulated me on my initiation to JeungSan Do.
They also told me that this afternoon the Master
Teacher was going to give a lecture on how the
restructuring of the spiritual order shall manifest
themselves on the political order on earth.
Chapter 18  Manifestation of the Restructuring of
Spiritual Order on Earth


      With a gentle ring of a bell the lecture began.
We were all gathered in the lecture hall and awaited
for him to begin eagerly.
      "In today's lecture I lay out a summary on the
strategy of the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim for the new
world order.  I am the fourth generation in my family
to have faith in the JeungSan SangJeNim and the Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim's plans have been handed down
to me from my father the Great Supreme Teacher
WoonSan Ahn.  And as the individual who is
responsible for implementing the last phase of the
strategy to finally claim the rightful position for
Korea, I seek ways to implement it in today's lecture.
      "The Lord JeungSan had said that to know the
way of I-Ching is to know My Plans.  Thus in Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim's plans, Change is an integral
part of His purpose.  One common characteristic in His
strategies is that they not only take advantage of
'changes' but also bring about a 'change' toward the
JeungSan SangJeNim's purpose.  His hands guide all
political events of today.  Therefore, to His workers
His hands must be visible if we intend to carry out His
plans to the end.

      *     The Lord JeungSan SangJeNim has
      stated; "In today's politics I place the turn of
      coming events under the scenario of five spirits
      playing the game of go ('Baduk' game).  Two
      spirits are playing the game, the other two
      spirits are giving advice and one spirit is the
      owner of the game.  The owner spirit cannot
      assist one or the other, thus it only provides a
      comfortable place to play.  If the owner spirit
      does not lack in providing yearly events and
      showing hospitality to the guests, then that will
      be the end of the owner's role.  When the game
      ends, the game board and game pieces shall be
      returned to the owner.  A long time ago the
      King Han was known to have conquered the
      world on a horseback, but we shall gain the
      world while sitting down"  (p.275).

Strategy

      When the JeungSan SangJeNim was born in late
nineteenth century, all Asian countries, especially
Korea, faced the possibility of extinction due to rising
imperialism of industrialized European nations.  Many
countries in Asia including India had lost their
independence to European nations already.  China had
just lost the Opium War and was starting to lose its
independence.  Korea was next in line.
      "The Lord JeungSan SangJeNim decided that he
must take on the world and formulate a global plan in
order to save Korea.  Yet, His plans involved not only
saving Korea from the Western forces but also saving
the humanity from the destructive forces of human
ignorance of the natural occurrence of the Coming
Cosmic Fall Time.

      *     The JeungSan SangJeNim stated, "The
      world events are like wrestling matches.  After
      the promotional and pregame, the final match
      shall be determined by the main game"  (p.276).

      "Thus His one-hundred year strategy involved
following three stages:
      "Stage one:  Drive Westerners out of Korea and
Asia.  Not only was there a danger of losing
independence but there was the real danger of racial
extinction through interracial marriages.  Christianity
was rapidly entering Asian countries and it was
turning Koreans into descendants of Abraham.
      "Stage two:  Develop and industrialize Asian
countries by employing the Japanese as their workers.
      "Stage three:  Create global balance of power
among European, American and Asian countries by
placing Korea in its rightful global leadership position.

Implementation

      Stage One

      "Stage one was implemented by the Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim himself in early 1900.  If Asian
nations were to be colonized properly by the Western
nations, an influx of Westerners with their values were
expected.  In South America the native indian
population almost became extinct through mass
murders of the male population and interracial
marriages of the female population with newly
arriving male westerners.  Christianity was already
expanding in Korea, turning Koreans into descendants
of Abraham.  Extinction of Korea's identity as a
culture, a race and an independent national unit
became real.  Thus JeungSan SangJeNim decided to
drive the Westerners out of Korea.
      "He first had to establish a cultural movement
that woke up Koreans and reaffirmed their own
Eastern values.  However, this movement alone was not
going to be enough in front of the Western guns.  Thus
in order to drive the Westerners physically out of
Korea, he engineered World War I, so Westerners had to
fight among themselves and had to abandon their
imperialist push in Asia.
      "The 'Dong Hak' - meaning Eastern School -
religious movement was started in Korea in response to
rising Western imperialism, Christianity and
incompetent Korean government that was unable to
deal with the changing conditions.  In early 1900 the
'Dong Hak' followers, mostly farmers, revolted against
the Korean government.  The farmers marched to Seoul
and the Korean government was unable to stop the
revolt.  The Korean government called in the Japanese
troops.  The Japanese, with their firepower, stopped
the revolt.  After the incident the Japanese troops
remained in Seoul and started to 'participate' in affairs
of Korea.  The Russians who were in Korea before the
Japanese did not look upon this change of situation
favorably.  To the Russians, Korea was the perfect
port with which to expand into the Pacific.  To the
Japanese, Korea was the perfect bridge to enter the
Asian continent.  Japan, allied with Great Britain in
1902, began to build its Naval forces.  Russia, allied
with France in 1903, suggested that they split Korea at
the thirty-ninth altitude.  Japan and Britain refused
this offer and a war broke out between Russia and
Japan.
      "Unfamiliar with their way around in Korean
Sea and unaware of the typhoon season, Russian fleets
were truly taken by surprise.  Thirty-eight Russian
baltic fleets sunk in May of 1905 at the Sushima
Straight.  The Russians lost the war.  It was  JeungSan
SangJeNim's plan to call upon the Southeast wind that
destroyed the Russian fleet.
      "The news of Russian defeat restructured the
balance of power in Europe.  The newly rising German
Empire was freed from the worry of guarding its back
door and started World War I.  European nations had to
abandon their imperialist push in Asia and had to
focus their attention in Europe.  Korea was
temporarily placed under Japanese rule.

      *     "The JeungSan SangJeNim had stated,
      'DongHak followers wrongly interpreted the
      AnShim song and decided to revolt.  The
      Japanese studied money-making, gun-making
      and all wealth-making techniques for over three
      hundred years.  You have not studied longer
      than three months with a single mind; how can
      you possibly expect to be a match for the
      Japanese?  If you kill one Japanese, a hundred
      of Koreans shall die.  Do not think of such a
      thought.
            'Now I appoint SuWoon Choi as the
      keeper spirit over the lives of the Japanese,
      MyungSuk Jen as the keeper spirit over the lives
      of the Koreans and IlBu Kim as the keeper
      spirit over the lives of the Chinese.  They are in
      charge of deciding lifespans of individuals on
      their given nations.  Under my single command,
      over one night, I shall decide the coming world
      events to put them under a correct course"
      (p.277).

      "The Lord JeungSan SangJeNim placed Korea
under the Japanese rule so the Koreans could learn
new western techniques from the Japanese.  Also, the
JeungSan SangJeNim wanted to relieve the historical
desire on the part of Japanese toward Korea.
      "Japan, since its birth, had an 'inferiority
complex' toward Korea.  According to its creation
myth, an ancestress deity came down from Heaven
across the sea to found Japan.  The ancestress was a
Shilla (an ancient Korean nation) queen who was
ousted from power and was exiled to Japan.   Also
when PaikJae (another ancient Korean nation) lost its
war to Shilla, most of the PaikJae's ruling class fled to
Japan and became the ruling class in Japan.  Since
then, the descendants of PaikJae in Japan dreamed of
revenging its defeat.  And after 3000 years and
numerous attempts to conquer Korea, Japan finally
came to rule Korea.  However, the Koreans knew that
the Japanese rule could not last for more than
thirty-six years, and the Koreans planned for their
independence.
      "It was part of JeungSan SangJeNim's Plan to
have Korea under the Japanese rule for thirty-six
years.  The reason for the particular number of years, I
shall not go into.  However, if one reads the documents
and articles published by Korean independent
movement activists, they all predict that the Japanese
rule would not last for more than thirty-six years.
Even though the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim was a
Korean, He employed the Japanese to act as the
aggressor in Asia because:  first, the Japanese held a
historical grief toward Korea and second, the Japanese
had studied the western wealth and weapons with a
single will for over three-hundred years.  The Lord
JeungSan had said that He was empowering the
Japanese with the might to partake the world.  Yet He
had said that He was giving the Love to embrace the
world to the Koreans.  Thus until the very time of the
Cosmic Fall Time, the Japan shall ride the wave of
prosperity, but when the Cosmic Fall Time comes most
of Japan shall sink underneath the ocean.

      Stage Two

      "With European power out of Asia, Asian
nations industrialized among themselves by employing
Japanese as their workers.  Implementation of this
stage involved World War II.

      *     The Lord JeungSan had stated, "Korea is
      the go game board (BaDolPan) and Korean
      people are the go game pieces (BaDol).  In the
      future China and Japan shall fight and that is
      like the two spirits playing the go game.
      Western people shall divide in two: one side
      assisting China, and the other assisting Japan"
      (p.290).

      "China allied with Russia and Japan allied with
Germany.  In 1936 the China-Japan War finally broke
out in Manchuria.  Using Korea as its base to launch
an attack, Japan swallowed Asia within three months.
Japan planned to occupy and rule Asia indefinitely
and built the necessary infrastructure in Korea and
China.
      "World War II established Japan as a global
power and Western nations were forced to abandon
their imperialist ambitions in Asia.  In fact some
Western nations, especially the United States, drawn
into the Asian war by the bombing of the Pearl
Harbor, sought to give independence to nations
occupied by Japan in order to maintain balance of
power in Asia.  The Lord JeungSan had said that for
Japan to attempt to conquer U.S. goes against the law
of the spiritual world.  Japan had learned its weaponry
and wealth-making techniques from the U.S. and to
turn its guns on the U.S. could only bring punishment.
It was like a student aiming his gun at a teacher.  Such
an act could not be forgiven according to the Law of
Heaven and Japan would lose its war with an atrocious
end.

      *     "Now after learning science from the
      Western people, to turn around and to fight
      them goes against the law of the spiritual world.
      Thus I will work out an unknown method
      without consulting others for my workers.  Now
      for the Japanese to fight Americans is against
      the law of the spiritual world.  The Japanese
      shall be destroyed utterly"  (p.292).

      "After the death of JeungSan SangJeNim in
1909, following His plans, his wife, The TaeMo Go,
founded a new religion in worship of him.  The
religion emphasized Korean history, culture and
identity.  It prophesied doomsday for the Japanese.  It
foretold the coming Heaven on earth.  It taught a new
Yim-Yang relationship and prophesied that the Yim
(Female energy) period was coming.  Up to then, people
were living within a period where Yang (Male) energy
dominated and those with guns and weapons prospered.
However, the coming period would be the age of Yim
where peace and harmony would replace war and
conflicts.  That was why she, a woman, was founding
this new religion which will replace all old religions.
The religious movement caught on quickly in Korea
and by the end of the Japanese occupation, seven
million Koreans out of the total Korean population of
twenty million people were members of this new
religious movement called 'Bo-Chun' religion.
      "The religious movement gave new hope, a sense
of pride, purpose and identity to Koreans under the
Japanese occupation.  However, the death of the
TaeMo Go SuBuNim and of Mr. Kyung-Suk Cha, who
actually led the religious movement, brought about the
downfall nearing the end of the Japanese occupation.
Also the Japanese passed a new law explicitly
forbidding worshipping of this new religion in Korea
and prosecuted severely.  The followers went
underground.  After the end of the Japanese
occupation, those who believed in Marxism and
Christianity came into power and the TaeMo Go
SuBuNim's religious movement was brushed aside as a
superstition.
      "Nevertheless under our Great Supreme Teacher
WoonSan Ahn's leadership, JeungSan Do established
itself as the main religion of the Korean people after
the Korean independence.
      "After World War II another war awaited the
Koreans which resulted in solidifying the temporarily
divided Korea.  Yet the dividing of Korea was part of
the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim's plan.  The JeungSan
SangJeNim sought to unite the Yim-Yang relationship.
And in order to bring about a true union He had to
divide.  Dividing of Korea represented power struggle
between global political powers.  And unless men's
ideological differences and power struggles could be
overcome, Korea could not be united.  The Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim had designed it so that the union
of divided Korea could only be achieved through
realization of one's common root.  It is only when
Koreans realize who they are in the face of human
history that they can be rewarded with inheriting the
rightful space on earth.

      *     "The JeungSan SangJeNim had stated, 'In
      the future the war between Japan and China
      shall occur twice.  On the first war China shall
      lose.  The second war shall last ten years and at
      the end Japan shall be chased out and the
      Chinese army shall enter.  But they shall not be
      able to enter below the Han River in Korea and
      that is because a sudden disease (malaria) shall
      sweep them.  Then later the U.S. army shall
      return home without the Koreans having to lift
      a finger.'  After these words, the JeungSan
      SangJeNim sang the following words, 'DongRae
      WoolSan floats and the four nations of the
      world are popping like popcorn' "  (p.303-304).

Stage Three

      "And now we arrive at the third stage.  There
are three phases in the third stage.  Phase one started
with the Korean War.  By dividing Korea, Koreans
became the principal players in the global struggle
with the United States assisting the South and the
Soviet Union assisting the North.  The World Wars that
were triggered by Koreans have returned to Korea.
Sixteen principal nations of the world came to Korea
to assist the South in the Korean war.
      "Phase two started with the military takeover of
the Korean government by the general Park.  Under
his leadership Korea industrialized with financial
assistance from the U.S.
      "Phase Three started in 1974.  President Park
was assassinated and the general Chun assumed
Presidency.  By 1988 Korea demonstrated its ability to
become a global leader by hosting the Olympic games,
at which virtually every nation on earth was
represented.
      "In today's lecture I lay out the course of events
on the remaining years until the year 2000.  I specify
major strategic recommendations for Korea to follow.
The strategy targets are divided into three aspects; the
policy aspect, the business aspect and cultural aspect.

      1.  POLICY ASPECT

      "As the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim specified,
there are five principal nations who are engaged in the
game of go in Korea - the U.S., Soviet Union, China,
Japan, and Korea.

      "The United States has been helping South
Korea to gain much needed economic development.
According to JeungSan SangJeNim and the book of I-
Ching (the book of changes), Korea is the nation of
'Kan' - symbolizing northeast, young boy, fruit.  The
U.S. is the nation of 'Tae' - symbolizing west, young
girl, flower.  The global balance of power in Yim-Yang
relationship comes from the marriage of the two.
Importance of Korea to the U.S. shall manifest itself
strongly in the coming years.  The virtue of strong
Korea in maintaining the global balance of power and
world peace shall be reinforced.  Such a message
should be told to the American public.  Strong Korea is
important in maintaining a balance of power in U.S.-
Soviet relationship, U.S.-Japan relationship, and U.S.-
China relationship.  When the right time comes, just as
the JeungSan SangJeNim stated, the U.S. army shall
soon be withdrawing from Korea without any effort to
bring about such an act on the part of Koreans.  Korea
should respect the U.S., as one would respect one's
bride and woo America as one would woo a young girl
for a hand in marriage.

      "The break up of Soviet Union is inevitable.
And when such an event comes, North Korea shall be
hard-pressed to consider compromising talks.  As you
all know the JeungSan SangJeNim had prevented the
occurrence of an all-out nuclear wars, because if such
a war occurs, our humanity cannot possibly enter the
Coming Cosmic Fall Time.  No one can build a Heaven
on Earth in the midst of a nuclear wasteland.  In fact,
even if there were no nuclear wars, the stock-pile of
underground nuclear weapons should blow up when
the earth's axis shifts upright.  The shock of shifting
earth's axis should be enough to detonate all
underground nuclear weapons.  Just think of the irony!
Those nations that possess nuclear weapons shall be the
first to fall upon destruction when the Cosmic Fall
Time comes.  In order to prevent such dismal
situations, the JeungSan SangJeNim performed Rituals
to bring about the nuclear disarmament.

      *     "One day the JeungSan SangJeNim told
      HyungYul Kim, 'Now I bury the 'Disaster by
      fire' underground, be careful of fire in your
      house.  If your house catches fire, the fire
      spirits shall gain power and destroy the world.'
      Alarmed, HyungYul told his household people
      to be careful of fire and watched fire carefully
      all day long"  (p.302).

      *     "If a fire as large as the biggest
      mountain appears and rolls around the world,
      the whole world shall turn to ashes.  Thus now I
      bury that fire"  (p.303).

      "Korea needs to establish a stronger tie with the
Soviet Union.  By pursuing trading relationships with
regional republics of the Soviet Union, Korea shall be
well-positioned to be favored over North Korea when
the eventual break up of the Soviet Union comes.
Especially by investing in and developing Siberia (the
ancestral land of Korea), Korea shall be able to gain
the upper hand in its political ties with the Soviet
Union while gaining the much needed raw materials.

      "In the near future the relationship between
South Korea and China shall become official.  Korea
should court China.  Korea shall be investing heavily
in Manchuria and YeonByun where the majority of the
population is Korean.  We need to strengthen ties with
provincial governments of China.  We need to make the
provincial governments allies of Korea.  Even though
on the surface China looks like a strongly centrally
governed nation, within China there are at least 100
different ethnic groups with different languages.  It is
only matter of time before China eventually splits up
into many smaller nations.  Already the provincial
governments are dictating most of the policy matters
within their territories.

      "Even though Japan shall surface as the global
economic superpower, she will not be able to offer the
necessary global leadership.  It cannot be the leading
political nation of the world.  It shall make many
enemies with other nations of the world.  Especially it
shall make an enemy with the U.S.  Korea shall use
Japan's economic power as an international leverage
point.  If Korea boosted Japan's arrogance by touting
her as the Asia's leader nation while keeping a closer
tie with the U.S., Korea should be able to isolate Japan
further while allowing Japan the satisfaction of being
the political leader in the Pacific.

      "Concerning Korea, we should pursue a five
Korea policy, not a two Korea policy.  South Korea,
North Korea, Manchuria, YeonByun and Siberia are all
ancient Korean lands.  When the Cosmic Fall Time
comes they shall be part of a unified Korea.  We should
strengthen ties with all these regions.

      2.  BUSINESS ASPECT

      "The United States is a resource rich country.
The U.S.'s economic strength has a staying power
beyond temporary ups and downs.  It has been
establishing a goodwill relationship with other nations
for the past one-hundred years.  However, American
industries will be in trouble when its military industry
no longer commands as much business as before.  There
shall be a great cost associated with restructuring the
whole economy to suit changing consumer tastes.  The
enormous double burden of budget deficit and trade
deficit looms over the U.S.  According to one estimate,
by late 1990's the U.S. government will not even be
able to meet the yearly interest payments on
government debt from the total yearly tax revenue.
Because the U.S. currency is the common currency
world-wide today, the U.S. government can get away
with such an enormous debt by issuing more debts.
However, prolonged recessionary pressure shall finally
catch up with America.  The JeungSan SangJeNim had
told us that the world economy is about to come to an
end because as the population rise, there are only
limited amount of natural resources.  As we approach
the Coming Cosmic Fall Time, we need to develop a
new economic system that takes into account the global
nature of new economic needs; otherwise, the
nationalistic sentiment shall pervade in the U.S.  Korea
should accommodate the wishes of its bride nation, the
U.S.  At the same time Korea should be a partner of
the U.S. in her international business activities.
Korean companies should partake in U.S. companies'
business activities in China, Soviet Union and Japan.
Korea needs to spend heavily in the U.S. in expressing
its good will messages.  Korea needs to be the prime
exporter of cultural products in the U.S.  America has
to become aware of the fact that Korea shall become
the leading nation of the world.

      "When Soviet Union breaks up, there shall be a
great uncertainty.  Much needed economic
infrastructure will have to be built.  Korean companies
should go into Soviet Union with a full force.  Korean
companies should establish themselves as the much
needed trading company for different nations within
Soviet Union.  Especially in Siberia, Korea should
build its homeland there.

      "China will be breaking up into smaller nations.
Korea should establish business ties with local
governments.  Due to government-controlled
production and distribution there are substantial price
differences between provinces in manufactured goods.
Yet because of the nature of controlled economy,
provincial governments cannot trade excess goods
among themselves.  Korean companies should establish
themselves as trading companies within China and
promote trade among provincial governments.  By
doing so, provincial governments shall gain the
necessary wealth to be independent from the central
government.  Korea should develop Manchuria and
YeonByun where the majority of the population is
Korean.  Eventually they shall be part of Korea.

      "Japan and Japanese capital should be employed
to develop the Pacific nations.  Japan shall try to be
the global economic powerhouse by establishing itself
as the economic leader among Asian Pacific countries.
Korea should encourage such a desire and allow her to
deploy her capital to develop Asian countries.
Eventually two-thirds of Japan shall sink under the
ocean when the Cosmic Fall Time comes.  It is essential
that Japan's wealth gets transferred to other Asian
nations.  When the Cosmic Fall Time comes, Japan shall
not be able to function as an independent nation.  She
shall be one of the provincial states of Korea.

      "Korea needs to be the major exporter of
cultural products to the world.  Its nine thousand years
of history contains a universal message for the
salvation of humanity.  The period of cheap labor
exports are coming to an end for Korea.  Based on such
an enduring cultural message, Koreans should be the
developers of her original lands in Manchuria,
YeonByun and Siberia.  South Korea should encourage
North Korea as its trading partner.  South Korea
should gain access to roads and rails in North Korea.
Exchange of labor, goods and tourism should be
encouraged.  South Korea should open up its economy
and actively promote her openness.  By doing so, it can
function as the gateway in Asia - an all-important
crossroad between the East and the West.  It can
establish itself as the center of the world.  Seoul shall
be developed as the global financial capital while
TaeJeon being developed as the global political capital
with a world scale airport and convention centers.
GunSan shall develop into the world's largest seaport
as China opens up.

      3.  CULTURAL ASPECT

      "This is the most important link in the strategy.
Just as the implementation of the First stage involved
Dong-Hak Religious movement and the Second stage
involved Bo-Chun Religious movement, the
implementation of the final stage will require a
religious movement that will awaken Korean values
among Koreans.  Rebirth of Korean cultural identity
will be necessary not only to unite Koreans world-wide
but also to present a coherent value to the world for
the twenty-first century.  With these values, Korea will
be leading the World.
      "Rebirth of TaeMo Go SuBuNim's teachings
among Korean college students has taken off recently.
On every college campus in Korea, there are now
JeungSan Do clubs dedicated to studying the Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim's words.  (Even though Bo-Chun
Religious movement failed and went underground,
virtually everyone in Korea knew of the Lord
JeungSan SangJeNim's teachings during the Japanese
occupation.  Thus after Korean independence, every
religion in Korea incorporated His teachings in one
form or another)  JeungSan Kang's strategies are
openly being discussed and written about among
Korean intellectuals.  Within the last ten years, there
have been more than one-hundred books published
explicitly trying to study his strategies.  (However,
only a handful of people in Korea know the full scope
of his strategies.)  Recently his strategies have become
a required knowledge among Tokyo University
professors.  I feel there is an urgent need to let the
world understand His teachings properly.  Otherwise,
His teachings have been abused by the wrong people in
the past and there is a grave danger that they will be
abused for the wrong purpose in the future.
      "Today we, the followers of JeungSan Do, face
challenging times ahead.  We are the ones who hold the
key to the future of our universe.  JeungSan Do
Religious movement shall install new values, new
purposes and new visions to the people of everywhere.
Koreans who have immigrated to the farthest ends of
the world within last one-hundred years shall soon be
awakened to the Truth of the Lord JeungSan
SangJeNim and to the knowledge of the Coming
Cosmic Fall Time.  JeungSan Do shall provide the
needed respect for the land, the origin of people and
the Truth of our time for all people everywhere.  Even
in America, where people from all over the globe are
gathered to form a nation, JeungSan Do shall provide
the needed pride for one's root, idea and product.
Without the teachings of JeungSan Do, humanity today
shall not find the needed vision for the Coming New
Era.

      Chapter 19  Spirit Soldiers


      The night came fast.  From the front yard of
the Head Temple I could see the night sky unfolding
its bright stars.  On the Northwestern sky, it was
cloudy and not many stars shone.  On the Southeastern
sky the stars shone brightly.  Together the night sky
formed a hugh swirling Yim-Yang symbol.  Kneeling
in front of SangJeNim's portrait, I started chanting
TaeUlJu song of life.

      I must have chanted for a long while when
suddenly a bright light radiated towards me and a
vision suddenly appeared.  I was standing with six
other people.  We were dressed in traditional Korean
white robes.
      People were lying on the ground.  They
appeared dead.  We entered a building.  The guard had
died while eating his lunch.  In offices people had died
while emersed in their work.  Some died holding their
telephone.  Some died while typing a memo on a
computer.  I could see the Spirit Soldiers flying around
in their red dress holding their fire swords.  They
demanded sins to be brought out into the open.
      The Spirit Soldiers took souls of sinners.  After
losing their souls to the Spirit Soldiers, people died left
and right without even being able to utter a sound of
protest.  But then I noticed an individual with a bright
aura radiating from his body.  Even though his soul
was taken away, his earthly good deeds shined through
from his body.  We approached him.  I noticed that I
was holding in my hand a mark which I had seen
before on the cover of the book The Truth of JeungSan
Do.  Somehow by using the mark as the signal to the
spirits and by applying six different medicines that
those six people who were with me had, we brought his
soul back to his body.  Upon his awakening, we told
him to thank JeungSan SangJeNim and to read
TaeUlJu Song of Life.  He was crying.  He said he had
seen his death.  He said he had seen his sins.  We told
him to pray with a single mind to JeungSan SangJeNim
in order to purge his sins and to read TaeUlJu song of
life.  Now I saw people awakening from their deaths.
They followed us reading TaeUlJu.  The sound of
TaeUlJu purified the land, the air, the water and the
mind of people.
      The scene suddenly changed and I was back in
TaeJeon city.  The place where our Head Temple was
located had changed into a huge complex of tall and
wide buildings.  The sound of TaeUlJu Song of Life
echoed into the Earth and Heaven.  People of every
ethnic background were gathered here.  In front of the
main building tall letters read "The United
Government For People And Spirits."  I could see at
least a thousand spirits following a person assisting his
or her wishes.  At the top of the building, a bright light
radiated out.  Along the radiating sound of TaeUlJu,
the light stretched into Twenty-four directions.  The
light flooded onto me.  I could hear my own TaeUlJu
sound being emersed into the light.  JeungSan
SangJeNim's face then appeared out of the light.  With
a gentle smile he entered into my heart.  As if I were
shocked with electricity, I felt my heart being
electrified with a determined will for Justice.

      Chapter 20  The Awakened One



      Next day on early morning I was visited by a
fellow JeungSan Do worker in my hotel room.  He said
that the Great Supreme teacher WoonSan Ahn wanted
to see me.  With a childlike excitement I accompanied
him to the Supreme Teacher's house.
      The house was a small traditional Korean house.
Upon entering the house I could see fellow JeungSan
Do workers busily writing books on the Lord JeungSan
SangJeNim's plans.  Past the small front yard I stepped
onto the main floor of the house after taking off my
shoes.  Past the main floor there was an open sliding
door into which my fellow worker walked in.  There
was an unobtrusive looking old man sitting in a
kneeling position.  Upon seeing us entering his room,
his stood up.  We bowed to him twice.  And I sat down
kneeling in front of him.  He sat down kneeling as
well.  I had heard he was over sixty years of age; yet
his face had a boyish glow.  He had an inviting smile.
He did not have the usual quality of unapproachable
superiority that I had become accustomed to in many
religious leaders, so much that I felt a sense of
friendship from him already.  For a brief moment I
felt like bragging to him about my many spiritual
experiences so far.  I told him about my Cosmic Fall
Time vision last night.
      "You seek Do!" He proclaimed, as if he was
reading my mind of brief arrogance.  He did not
respond to my vision statement.  He abruptly told me
of following SangJeNim's Saying.

      *     "A long time ago an individual sought to
      attain Do (Attainment).  He searched long and
      wide for the right teacher.  One day a stranger
      took him in and said I shall teach you Do;
      however, you must show me ten years of
      devotion.  Thus he worked as his servant and
      aided in his farming efforts for ten years.
      After having fulfilled his obligations for ten
      years, the teacher applauded his efforts and
      said that he would teach him Do.  The teacher
      brought him to a nearby pond and told him to
      jump from the branch of the Spruce tree
      standing next to the pond in order to attain Do.
      The servant, faithfully believing his words,
      climbed upon the branch and jumped into the
      water.  Before he hit the water a five-colored
      cloud unexpectedly gathered with heavenly
      music and a saint appeared riding the cloud.
      Taking the falling servant on the cloud, the
      saint rose into the Heaven.  Now study
      carefully whether this attainment of Do was
      due to the teacher's magic or due to the
      student's faithful devotion"  (p.386).

      Looking at my puzzled face, he continued, "You
do not yet know what JeungSan Do is.  The only way
to find out is by participating in the Lord JeungSan
SangJeNim's Plans with a great devotion and single-
mindedness."  He recited the following SangJeNim
Saying.

      *     "The determinants of a project's success
      or failure originate from the law of Heaven and
      Earth.  It is not an inherent value within human
      nature.  Yet without the human will to act on
      the proposed project, Heaven and Earth cannot
      achieve its purpose.  Thus Heaven and Earth
      bear humanity to attain its own fulfillment.
      Now, if a human born in this time of Great
      Change does not participate in this great
      fulfillment of natural order, how can we call
      her/him a human being"  (p.431).

      Hearing him, I felt ashamed of my brief
arrogance.  I felt gratefully humble.  I confessed my
ignorance.  "Teacher, I still am not sure what to do."

      With an unyielding assurance in his voice he
told me to follow following four rules of JeungSan Do:

      1.  Do not cause injustice (grief) in others:
(HaeWon).
      2.  Do not deceive your mind.
      3.  Better others: (SangSeng).
      4.  Speak justly of others.
      5.  Pay back even the gratitude of a half loaf of
bread: (BoEun).

      "Such activities all come from having the pure
heart of a single mind.  And a single mind can be had
by having devotion, respect and faith.
      "Please tell me how to do them,"  I asked him.
      "Know the following SangJeNim Sayings and
you shall find peace within yourself,"  He said.

      *     "You must purify your mind in order to
      gain prosperity.  Those who desire someone
      else's wealth shall call upon the force of robbers
      and fail to sustain wealth in the end"  (p.387).

      *     "If you guard your true mind, prosperity
      shall come upon you first"  (p.387).

      *     "Do not be jealous of other's prosperity.
      There is much unclaimed wealth.  Seek those
      avenues"  (p.387).

      *     "People say hardship precede well-being.
      Bear the hardship well and you shall gain your
      wealth in the end.  Those who are comfortable
      in the Cosmic Summer Time cannot receive the
      wealth of the Cosmic Fall Time.  Thus know
      your hardship as a good fortune.  If you
      abandon your work due to the hardship, you are
      throwing away your coming wealth"  (p.388).

      Without hesitation, he continued.  "The Truth of
JeungSan Do starts with family matters.  Know the
following SangJeNim Sayings and your family shall
find peace."

      *     "Jang, IkMo loved his young son dearly.
      One day JeungSan SangJeNim spoke to IkMo,
      "Good fortune comes from above and it does not
      rise from below.  Love and respect your parents
      with utmost care"  (p.387).

      *     "This is the time of Coming Home.
      Roots and cultures of individuals shall be
      corrected.  Thus those who have abandoned,
      betrayed and forgotten one's ancestors shall all
      die without exception"  (p.394).

      *     "You come to have faith in me as a result
      of the good deeds of your ancestors.  Thus, if
      those with such ancestors go astray by chance
      from my shadow, their ancestor spirits shall
      slap their backs and tell them, 'you shall die if
      you step outside of here.'  However, for those
      descendants whose ancestors are without good
      deeds, even if they walked into my shadow by
      chance, spirits shall slap their brows and say
      'this is no place for you to be' "  (p.395).

      He spoke on, "Kan, you are now about the age
to be married.  Marriage is the basis for a family life
and the one who is on the path to JeungSan Do must
remember following SangJeNim Sayings on women and
on wife."

      *     "Now is the time of wish fulfillment.
      For many thousand years women have been
      locked into the position of subservience serving
      erotic, debasing and tortuous whims of men.
      Thus now I answer the wish of the womankind.
      I construct new order of Heaven and Earth
      according to the law of equal Yim and Yang.
      And from now on I design a new relationship
      between women and men.  A man shall not be
      able to exercise his rights without listening to a
      woman" (p.211).

      *     "One day the JeungSan SangJeNim, lying
      on his back, asked His Wife The TaeMo Go
      SuBuNim to sit on his stomach.  With a kitchen
      knife in her hand, aiming at the JeungSan
      SangJeNim's stomach, The TaeMo Go SuBuNim
      was told to ask the JeungSan SangJeNim
      whether He shall let Her be the First for all
      things and lest Her be in charge of all matters.
      To this our JeungSan SangJeNim answered 'Yes'
      under the aim of the kitchen knife"  (p.212).

      *     "The one who is on the path to achieve
      the high Do (Attainment) must first be able to
      change the desires of his wife so she shall
      follow him into the path of Do.  If no matter
      how hard you try, you cannot change her mind,
      bow your head deeper in respect for her.  Make
      this your daily habit and finally she shall
      follow you in your difficult journey.  This is
      the way our ancestors conducted their
      relationship"  (p.427).

      He stopped briefly to check whether I was
following him.  Timidly I asked him, "Teacher, how
can I get JeungSan SangJeNim's faith?"  His eyes
sparkled briefly as if he were approving my question.
      "The SangJeNim has said following words
regarding your question," He said.

      *     "You must give your faith to me in order
      to gain my  faith in you"  (p.390).

      *     "Increase your faith as you would train a
      bow.  If you pull a bow too fast, it shall break
      in half.  It must be done in a slow and steady
      manner"  (p.390).

      "Teacher, I heard spirits reading TaeUlJu Song
of Life with me.  Is this normal?"  Now I started asking
him questions in earnest.  And He told me following
SangJeNim Saying.

      *     "Everyone has guiding spirits according
      to one's state of Do (Attainment) and courage.
      If you are jealous of another's study and neglect
      your own study, then your guiding spirits shall
      move onto him"  (p.392).

      He did not answer my questions directly.  As if
he was reading my mind, He told me of SangJeNim's
Sayings that were appropriate to my questions.  I had
read SangJeNim's Sayings before but they did not
really make much sense to me.  Now the words
registered in my heart as they rang in my mind.

      "Kan, always speak well of others."  When he
called out my name, I was awakened to his words and
attentively listened to him.  "If you speak well of
others, then spirits shall follow you."

      *     "One day HyungYul spoke badly to a
      person.  Watching this, the JeungSan SangJeNim
      told him, 'If you dislike all, then all is weed.  If
      you take a better look and take what is good,
      then all are flowers.  Words are the sounds of
      the mind.  Actions are the Shadow of words.  If
      you speak well of others, fortunes would bring
      bigger fortunes to you.  If you speak ill of
      others, disasters would bring bigger disasters to
      you"  (p.392).

      "Teacher, in order to build a better world on
earth we will need a lot of money.  I am not doubting
JeungSan SangJeNim's plans, but how are we going to
do anything without a lot of money?"  I felt my
question was a little naive, yet I think the Great
Supreme Teacher took my question seriously.  Without
hesitation he told me following SangJeNim's Sayings.

      *     "The Lord JeungSan said to GongWoo,
      'how much wealth do you need?'
            GongWoo answered, 'The more the
      wealth, the better it would be.'
            'Where do you intend to use the wealth?'
            'I would like to help those in poverty.'
            SangJeNim answered, 'Too much wealth
      neglects wealth.  It is better to have money in
      moderation' "  (p.387).

      *     "Money comes around because it goes
      around.  It is not something that is worth
      seeking for its own sake.  Even one-hundred
      years worth of accumulated wealth disappears
      overnight.  During the Cosmic Summer Time
      people blindly followed unjust individuals if
      there was money involved.  However, from now
      on I shall open the eyes of people to follow a
      just person"  (p.394).

      "However, Kan, at the same time money is an
expression of gratitude, devotion and faith."  He spoke
on with the following SangJeNim Sayings.

      *     "On 1904 Mr. NamShin Paik got into
      trouble with the authorities and went into
      hiding.  He sent ByungWook Kim to SangJeNim
      to ask of a solution to this dilemma.  SangJeNim
      said, 'A rich person must pay money.'  Have him
      bring me a promissory note in amount of ten-
      thousand Nang (an enormous amount of money).
      NamShin presented the ten-thousand Nang Note
      and his trouble with the authority was soon
      resolved.  SangJeNim soon burned the note"
      (p.409).

      *     "Without material commitment, the
      efforts are without devotion and determination.
      If you want to know the mind of another
      person, ask for money"  (p.427).

      By now my ankles started to hurt a little, yet
the Supreme Teacher was sitting on his kneeling
posture with a straight back without even a momentary
stirring.  I could sense that he had been meditating all
his life.  I wanted to ask him about my meditation
experience.  "Teacher, when I read TaeUlJu Song of
Life, energy is gathered at the bottom part of the
stomach and it comes up through the back spine."  I
think he sensed immaturity in my comments on
meditation.  He interrupted my question and spoke.
"Kan, one does not meditate simply for the sake of
meditation.  Meditation is a way to study the Truth
within us.  Remember the following SangJeNim Saying
before you congratulate yourself on temporary rupture
through meditation."

      *     "There has been a saying that 'Life is the
      best teacher'.  However, this saying is not
      entirely correct.  Even Heaven and Earth must
      study if it intends to offer wind and rain.
      'Nothing is knowable without studying' "
      (p.395).

      *     "Chanting is good, no matter what you
      chant, as long as you have faith in it.  I have
      tested TaeUlJu Song-of-Life and WoonJangJu
      Song-of-Life.  You shall practice them daily.  I
      have resolved the disaster of ByungWook Kim
      with TaeUlJu and I have dissolved the crisis of
      HyoSoon Jang with WoonJangJu.  TaeUlJu shall
      open the gate of salvation even if you have
      violated the law of nature.  WoonJangJu shall
      open the prison gate even if you committed a
      murder"  (p.395).

      *     "Sleep less and read TaeUlJu
      Song-of-Life.  It is the highest King of Heaven.
      For fifty-thousand years in all schools of every
      village, TaeUlJu shall be memorized and sung
      when the Cosmic Fall Time comes"  (p.399).

      "Kan, always read TaeUlJu with a great
devotion.  Read it with a respect.  Read it with a faith.
Read it with a single mind.  Read it after the offering
of purified water to SangJeNim.  Read it after the
prayer to SangJeNim.  Read it after bowing to
SangJeNim four times.  Otherwise, temporary
meditative state is all you will get out of it."

      "Supreme Teacher, I had not have much
experience with praying in my life.  Please tell me
what is the proper way to do it."  He told me the
following SangJeNim Saying.

      *     "GongWoo's wife fell down one day on
      ice and broke her back and her legs.  She could
      not move and GongWoo was deeply worried.
      Placing a bowl of purified water in the
      direction of SangJeNim, GongWoo prayed with
      devotion of one mind for the cure of his wife.
      Soon his wife recovered from her injury.  Later
      when GongWoo came to see SangJeNim, with a
      smile, SangJeNim said to GongWoo, 'How
      deeply were you worried about your wife's
      injury' "  (p.407).

      He briefly stopped to light a pipe cigarette.
Even while smoking, his posture did not deter from its
upright position.  I suddenly felt like asking him a
question that was in my mind for a long time.
"Supreme teacher, since I began the search for the
truth of JeungSan Do, I have done much meditation
and studying.  Yet sometimes when I see a pretty
woman I cannot help but desire her in my mind."
      As if he were expecting my question, he
answered me without any hesitation.  "Kan, the one
who is on the path to attainment must keep a proper
balance of Yim and Yang in his mind and action.  It is
a natural male urge to desire a woman.  Especially for
the one who is on the path to attainment, his desires
shall be louder than others.  Women can sense that
from you and desire you as well.  Yet you must
maintain purity in your heart.  Otherwise, misdirected
desires on women shall destroy the proper Yim-Yang
relationship in your mind.  Know the following
SangJeNim Saying and abandon useless waste of
energy."

      *     "While passing TaeIn village with
      SangJeNim, GongWoo saw one young woman
      walking by.  Even though GongWoo could not
      look at her directly, he could not forget the
      beauty of her.  He desired her in his mind.
      Knowing this, SangJeNim told GongWoo,
      'Sexual desires deplete a man's energy.  From
      now on when you meet a woman, look at her at
      full appreciation of her beauty and do not keep
      her in your mind.'  GongWoo realized
      SangJeNim's words, and whenever he saw
      women he did as he was told.  Sexual desires no
      longer occurred in his mind"  (p.423).

      "Supreme Teacher, what is sin and how can I
avoid it?"  Now my timidity disappeared and I asked
him questions with which I was concerned for a long
time.  Despite the fact that I had gained some insight
into the spiritual world, I knew I was still the same
corrupt person.  I desired to be SangJeNim's worker
and my conversations with the Great Supreme Teacher
so far had painfully revealed my limited purity in
heart.  I felt it was imperative for me to ask
forgiveness to SangJeNim for my past sins.  As if he
had been waiting for me to ask him this question, he
answered my concerns with following SangJeNim
Sayings.

      *     "There is no greater sin than to cut off
      the hereditary lineage and relationship of
      parents and their children.  Look how after his
      death IkHyun Choi begs of forgiveness to me
      from his sin of cutting off the Father and Son
      lineage between King GoJong and his son"
      (p.410).

      *     "The sin of committing sexual conduct
      with someone else's wife is like betraying the
      origin of all nature.  This sin is too great.  Even
      I do not interfere in these matters in their
      natural punishment"  (p.410).

      *     "Among sins, the sin of gambling is the
      worst.  Other sins you commit alone.  However,
      in gambling you involve others in your sin.
      And without deceiving other people you cannot
      win"  (p.410).

      *     "Among people, those who have
      committed the worst crime shall receive
      punishment from Heaven.  Those with lesser
      crimes shall be punished by spirits or by people"
      (p.410).

      *     "The JeungSan SangJeNim, while
      drinking with HyungYul Kim, and WonIl Shin,
      at a local drinking house, said to WonIl, 'Today
      I need to use lightning.  Bring me a cup of
      wine.'  After receiving a cup full of wine, the
      JeungSan SangJeNim held the cup in the air
      and then circled the cup twice.  When He drank
      the wine,  a cloud suddenly gathered and rain
      poured down with loud thunder and lightning.
      And then as quickly as it came,  the sky cleared.
      SangJeNim bid WonIl to go to KyungWon Shin's
      house and find out what happened.
            "When WonIl arrived at KyungWon's
      house, a firewood merchant came into
      KyungWon's house in order to avoid rain.  And
      with a disturbed tone the merchant said, 'Today
      I saw the strangest thing.  While coming this
      way I saw a young woman fighting with an old
      woman.  I heard what they were arguing about.
      As it turned out, the young woman was the old
      woman's daughter-in-law.  According to their
      arguments within seven days of bearing a son,
      the young woman's husband died.  Yet without
      even staging a funeral for her husband the
      young woman ran off, leaving the child behind.
      Thus the old woman was chasing her to beg her
      to take the child and raise him.  But the
      daughter-in-law argued with the old woman in
      favor of running off without the child.  Then
      suddenly lightning struck her and the
      daughter-in-law died.  Looking at this, I say
      there is still justice in Heavenly Ways.'  Hearing
      this, WonIl came back to report to SangJeNim.
      Then SangJeNim told to WonIl, 'This morning
      when I was coming here I saw a young woman
      hastily walking by and soon an old woman ran
      towards me and asked whether I had seen a
      young woman walk by.  After hearing what had
      happened from the old woman, I have decided
      that this crime was against human nature and
      could not be forgiven.
            "I heard that the young woman wedded
      out of her own desire for her husband.  A
      wedlock determined by parents is a marriage
      made by man.  A wedlock decided by their own
      wills is a marriage made in Heaven.  Arranged
      marriages determined by parents could be
      changed.  However, a wedlock decided upon by
      themselves cannot be changed.  Now the young
      woman goes against human nature and
      abandons her Heavenly promise.  How can there
      not be punishment from Heaven?"  (p.412).

      "Teacher, what should I do about my past sins?"
I asked him.  He told me the following SangJeNim
Saying.

      *     "One day SangJeNim told to GongWoo
      Park, 'Gather all your past unruly activities and
      unjust thoughts in your mind.'  GongWoo
      thought through all his past sins and reported
      them to SangJeNim.  A long time ago GongWoo
      once saw the activities of his king and his
      generals and was jealous of them.  He desired
      that he could one day be like them.  'Did you
      think such a thought is a sin or not?'
            "GongWoo answered, 'It could only be a
      sin.'  SangJeNim told him, 'Bow four times to
      me and bid in your mind that you shall never
      do so again' "  (p.415).

      "Supreme Teacher, how should I conduct so I
shall not commit a sin?"  I asked in sincerity.  And he
told me the following SangJeNim Sayings.

      *     "Even when someone else starts a fight,
      it is always better to lose.  If you fight with him
      you are worse than him.  How can you expect to
      receive help from spirits?  There is a saying
      that says: do not speak of what others eat and
      do not speak of with whom others sleep.  Do not
      speak of others' faults"  (p.417).

      *     "If someone hits you, take his hand and
      stroke it to lessen his pain"  (p.417).

      *     "No matter whom you meet be glad of
      him and treat him well.  Even if he does not
      realize your well intention, his guiding spirits
      will know and you shall be well received no
      matter where you go.  Even if you receive only
      a half a dinner do not forget the gratitude"
      (p.418).

      "Kan, before the occasion of committing a sin
arises, always guard your mind so such a misfortune do
not fall on you.  Know the following SangJeNim
Saying."

      *     "Big Love and Big Justice is without
      diseases"  (p.419).

      *     "YongSe Kim and NamKi Jung wished to
      be actors and to speak Japanese well.
      SangJeNim fulfilled their wishes and told them,
      'Those who study Do must keep their minds in
      justice and know where to stop.  If one wishes
      for something that is not one's own, one is
      bound to make mistakes"  (p.).

      "Kan, SangJeNim's workers should be void of
sins; thus, we can be pure at heart to have the
necessary ambition, desire and mind to act out Justice
in this world.  Remember the following SangJeNim
Sayings in your mind."

      *     "Meditate your mind on Saints.  And
      conduct your work according to the methods of
      Heroes"  (p.422).

      *     "Wind shall stop when time passes.  Do
      not bow down under oppression.  All things
      have their time"  (p.422).

      *     "My workers should be able to handle
      someone else's arrogance with humbleness"
      (p.422).

      *     "My workers must possess both strength
      and sensitivity.  And do not lean toward one or
      the other.  Even the Love of Heaven and Earth
      bears life in the spring but kills in the fall"
      (p.422).

      *     "Now the reason that works do not
      succeed is because there is no one with a single
      will.  If there is a single will, there is not a
      matter that can not succeed.  Thus on all
      matters do not think they cannot be done; just
      be weary of the fact that you did not have a
      single will"  (p.422).

      *     "I am in charge of human wealth.  Yet I
      am afraid there is not enough people with a
      single will.  If I see a single will, I shall
      distribute wealth without exception"  (p.422).

      *     "If one only knows without acting on the
      knowledge, then it is worse than not knowing at
      all.  Thus you must be able to prevent the
      achievable and achieve the unachievable.  You
      need to have the capacity to prevent the
      attainable and attain the unattainable"  (p.423).

      "Kan," He spoke with a stern determination,
"Our work is to raise people.  Our work is to act out
justice.  Our work is to lead people into the Coming
Cosmic Fall Time.  Our work is to bring life upon
people.  Our work is to bring about equality in Yim-
Yang relationship.  Know the following SangJeNim
Sayings and always act them out in your daily
activities."

      *     "When we select our workers, we do not
      distinguish male or female.  JinPyung is known
      to have employed 2000 women in his affairs"
      (p.425).

      *     "Even if a big opportunity is given to
      you, if you are not able to bear the
      accompanied hardship, such an opportunity
      shall return to its origin or you will lose the
      opportunity to someone else"  (p.425).

      *     "Not a single word of mine shall fall on
      the ground.  You shall put faith in my words.
      Even if there is only one person who shall have
      faith in my words, my work shall be done.
      Thus you shall do as you wish"  (p.426).

      *     "Gain faith among men and you shall
      gain faith among spirits"  (p.427).

      "Supreme Teacher, I have often wondered what
it would be like when the Cosmic Fall Time comes.
Teacher, what is WhoChun (Cosmic Fall Time) like?"
He told me the following SangJeNim Sayings.

      *     "My work is like the work of DongBin
      Yo.  DongBin sought to teach the way to
      everlasting life to a selected few people who
      believed in him.  Thus disguised as a comb
      merchant, he shouted out on the street that if
      you comb with this comb 'white hair becomes
      dark, a crooked back becomes straight, a weak
      one becomes strong, and an old face shall
      become young again.'  'The price of this comb is
      one thousand Nang (a very large sum of money
      for a comb).'  Everyone thought he was crazy; a
      comb could not possibly do what he said and a
      comb could not possibly be that expensive.  Yet
      one old woman bought DongBin's comb and as
      soon as she tried the comb, she became young
      again as DongBin said.  At this moment
      everyone rushed in to buy the comb and finally
      DongBin went up to Heaven and attained Do"
      (p.466).

      *     "In WhoChun (Cosmic Fall Time) all
      civilization on earth shall be of one big family.
      People shall be led with love and they shall be
      without police and punishments.  Authorities
      shall know their places among people.  People
      shall be without curse, conflicts, anger, jealousy
      and wrong desires.  Their words and laughters
      shall be full of joy.  Every action shall be
      according to Do (Attainment, Enlightenment);
      thus the pain of old age and diseases shall
      disappear.  There shall not be any difference in
      living standards between the authorities and
      people.  Good food and good clothes shall
      appear according to one's wish.  In all matters
      spirits shall assist according to one's free
      desires.  Riding on clouds, people shall fly far
      and wide.  The sky will be low and people shall
      go up and down at will.  People shall gain the
      necessary wisdom on past, present and the
      future and thus shall be without water, fire and
      wind disasters.  It shall indeed be paradise on
      earth"  (p.462).

      *     "In WhoChun authorities and assistants
      could be of foreign nationalities.  However, all
      kings, rulers and owners shall be of its own
      people: its own nationality"  (p.463).

      *     "In WhoChun only those who are very
      lucky shall have two children.  However, at the
      same time there shall not be anyone without a
      child.  Also, there shall be only one rich person
      in every state and the rest shall be of equal
      standing"  (p.466).

      *     "When water energy emerges from
      Heaven and Earth, all people shall understand
      each other without speaking.  When water
      energy evolves, there shall be a sound of a 'Big
      Bang.'  In WhoChun, language shall be unified
      as well"  (p.467).

      "Kan, in WhoChun, Korean language will be the
universal standard, while people's own ethnic
languages will remaining among its people to be
further developed and used."
      The Supreme Teacher went on explaining to me
about the Cosmic Fall Time as if he had seen it.  "In
WhoChun, SangJeNim ascends to the Tenth Heaven
which is the earth.  Thus He shall come back to earth
as a supreme spirit.

      *     "Remember my face well.  When I ascend
      to Earth, the Tenth Heaven, you shall be able to
      see me in my brightness.  In the past mythology
      people have spoken of resurrection (Shinson),
      yet no one has seen it.  However, only you, the
      coming humanity, shall be able to see
      resurrection of spirits (Shinson)"  (p.469).

      *     "When my time comes, in one night a
      building with 360,000 rooms shall be built.  And
      according to their own accomplishments my
      workers shall occupy the proper rooms in the
      building.  Spirits shall assist my workers with
      clothes and foods.  However, if there is one who
      is sitting at a place that is not his own, the
      spirits shall take him by the neck and throw
      him out"  (p.469).

      "Supreme Teacher, when the Cosmic Fall Time
(WhoChun) comes, what shall people be like?  Will they
all have achieved Attainment (Do)?  Shall everyone be
pure at heart?"  He told me the following SangJeNim
Sayings.

      *     "I shall give the authority to give out Do
      to the Supreme Teacher.  I only need to show
      him the proper method.  Why should I do all the
      work?  When opening Do, all attained spirits of
      Christianity, Buddhism and Confucianism shall
      gather and according to the accomplishment of
      my workers, they shall allow Do to manifest"
      (p.470).

      *     "Confucius was only able to have
      seventy-two people know the truth.  Buddha
      was only able to have five-hundred people
      know the truth.  However, even though there
      may be difference in degree, I shall open up the
      mind of even the regular citizens so they shall
      know their own work and place.  Men shall not
      covet someone else's wife.  People shall not pick
      up lost objects on streets.  And there shall not be
      robbers"  (p.471).

      *     "My study has three levels.  At the first
      level, my workers shall be able to conduct all
      matters at will.  At the second level, there is
      some limitation to properly acting out on
      knowledge.  At the third level, people will only
      know without being able to act it out on reality.
      Until my coming, people only knew without
      being able to bring it into fruition and thus
      they could not do things at will."  (p.471).

      *     "KyungWoo Park asked the SangJeNim,
      'please give me Do.'  SangJeNim scolded him.
      'What are you talking about?  For all Last
      Names, there are one ruling ancestral spirit who
      are part of the Heavenly government.  Now if I
      give Do to a single individual, then all ancestral
      spirits shall demand Do to be given to their
      descendants.  Thus I cannot perform any
      private favors.  When the Time comes, I shall let
      everyone attain Do at the same time according
      to one's accomplishments' "  (p.471).

      I thanked him for his soothing words.  He was
still sitting in his upright kneeling posture.  I promised
him that I shall be the SangJeNim's worker in America
to bring about Justice.  I promised him that I shall be
the bearer of the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim's message
in the U.S.  I promised him that I shall be the deliverer
of the people of America to the Cosmic Fall Time.  I
bid him farewell by bowing to him twice.  When I
walked out of his house, the street looked brighter.



      Chapter 21  The Mission


      I was back in New York again - the place where
my work awaited me.  Flying in, the familiar city of
lights on water floated by.  At the airport I was
awashed by the smell of the sweat of civilization
segmented.  People of all colors and creeds rushed by
me, pulling their luggage.  I thought of JeungSan
SangJeNim's word "ManGukIl" - work of every people
on earth -  and smiled to myself.  In this nation of all
cultures I needed to chart out human history.  I needed
to understand the correct unfolding of history and
preserve the uniqueness of all cultures.  I needed to
discover and show from where all cultures emanated.  I
needed to show the root of all civilization.  And I
needed to gather the blossoms of all cultures into a
unified harvest for the Coming Cosmic Fall Time.

      I was standing on Forty-second Street dressed in
a banker's black pinstriped suit.  Korean shopkeepers
selling custom jewelry were sitting on street corners
guarding their merchandize.  Next to the shop stood a
video store where the letter "X" was proudly displayed
all over the window.  Across the street stood a
run-down theater that proclaimed "Live Nude Girls".
A black man walked by, whispering "Scents, scents,
scents."  In the midst of all this, there was a man
yelling into a microphone, condemning the sins of
mankind and prophesying the imminent return of
Jesus Christ.
      "Even if Jesus Christ were to come, what can he
possibly do?"  I thought.  "Save the current humankind?
Is the humanity in need of being saved?  How?  From
what?  Even if Jesus Christ does succeed in saving the
current humanity, what good will that be?  No, we do
not need another god from heaven telling us what to
do.  Humanity must awaken themselves.  Humanity
must become aware of the Coming Cosmic Season.  The
work of preaching gods are done.  Now humanity must
act on SangJeNim's words.  Otherwise, the Cosmic Fall
Time cannot be the Time of awakened humanity.  It
will only be an extended time of the Cosmic Summer
Time.  It will only be of another place of human
servitude under the dictating gods.
      "Humanity will not be rid of its slavery
mentality.  In the end it is only us that will decide our
own maturity.  It is only those that have been unjustly
maltreated amongst us that shall judge injustice.
Judgment Time is upon us.  The founding concept of
this nation by the Hopis still guides this land.  The
birth of new culture in this land that incorporates all
cultures is about to begin.  We are all centers of a loop.

      "The birth and death of the Lord JeungSan
SangJeNim presents us with limitless human
possibility.  Our vision for tomorrow can shift the
earth's axis upright in order to bring about justice on
earth.  Our vision is firmly based in true historical root
of 9000 years of Korean legacy.  Our vision projects
human dignity.

      I see people walking around with grieving
spirits, asking for destruction and revenge upon the
person.  I see aborted babies floating around its
parents, plotting ill-will.  New York was filled with
agonizing cries of mistreated souls asking for justice in
this world.  On Forty-second Street I kneeled and
prayed to the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim.
      "SangJeNim, this land was built with guns and
forced labor.  This land is still dripping from the blood
of American Indians.  The agony, grief and torment of
the black slaves still cries out revenge.  SangJeNim, the
descendants of the slave owners still rule this land.
Yet they have not resolved the sins of their forbearers.
SangJeNim, please let them realize their sins.
SangJeNim, please let them correct their ancestors'
greed and murder.  SangJeNim, please allow them to
meet your truth.  I intend to lead them into the Coming
Cosmic Fall Time.  SangJeNim, please let them pray
for their sins.  Please allow them to ask forgiveness for
the crimes of their ancestors.  Please let them know
justice.  SangJeNim, allow me to give them the wisdom
to judge themselves and correct the wrong-doings of
their ancestors.  SangJeNim, people all over the world
had forgotten the purpose of creation.
      "SangJeNim, using science as their weapon, they
have raped nature and human soul.  They brag that
they have conquered the human mind.  Yet people all
over the world refuse the responsibility of inheriting
this earth.
      "SangJeNim, America from its inception was
developed by killing and violating the rightful roots to
this land.  Now this land cries out for its rightful ruler,
its rightful owner, its just root.  SangJeNim, allow me
to give the people of this land the responsibility for
their rich inheritance.  SangJeNim, allow me to help
them find their lost roots.  Thus, they can be the true
owners of their own destiny and true owners of this
lost land.  SangJeNim, allow the lost children to return
to their roots.  SangJeNim, let them finally come home
and be proud of their roots.  SangJeNim, let them be
proud of their inheritance and culture.

      I entered the United Nations general assembly
hall.  There I kneeled and prayed to SangJeNim.
"SangJeNim, I thank many spirits from all over the
world for their participation in the Korean war.
SangJeNim, please let the whole world awake to the
Truth.  Let us disarm nuclear weapons.  Let us feed the
hungry and poor.  Let us give independence to peoples
of different ethnic backgrounds.  SangJeNim, let the
Korean people of all over the world awake to their
roots and return to them.  SangJeNim allow me to work
for the Unified Korea and the Unified World."  Upon
my prayer a sudden warmth sprang up my spine and a
bright light pierced my forehead.  Suddenly I could see
the people from all over the globe, people of all ethnic
backgrounds praying to the Lord JeungSan SangJeNim
for the Coming Cosmic Fall Time on Earth and reading
the TaeUlJu Song of Life together.




       Epilogue


       If you have the urge to learn more about
JeungSanDo and TaeUlJu after reading this book, then
you just took the very first step in understanding the
Coming Justice of the Cosmic Fall Time.  Call me or write
to me at our New York Temple.  I am usually available to
answer you quest for the Truth.  I look forward to hearing
from you soon.


                                JaeNam Kim



       JeungSan DoJang (Temple) in America

       JeungSan DoJang New York Temple
       Tel: [phone]
       33-38 147th Street
       Flushing, NY  11354

       JeungSan DoJang Los Angeles Temple
       Tel: [phone]
       345 South Oxford Ave., #201
       Los Angeles, CA  90020






       JeungSan DoJang (Temple) in Korea


Head Quarter:  123-2 SeoGu, KweJengDong, TaeJeon City, South
Korea.  Tel: (01182) (42) 525-9125.



Seoul Area;
       KangNam DoJang:  [phone]
       DongDaeMun DoJang:  [phone]
       ShinDaeBang DoJang:  [phone]
       ShinChon DoJang:  [phone]
       SoongInDong DoJang:  [phone]

KyungKi State;
       InChon DoJang:  [phone]
       SuWon DoJang:  (0331) 48-4236
       BooChun DoJang:  [phone]
       DongDuChun DoJang:  (0351) 64-4286
       YiJengBu DoJang:  [phone]
       GunPo DoJang:  (0343) 53-3876
       PyungTaek DoJang:  [phone]
       AnSan DoJang:  (0345) 87-1831
       KwangMyung DoJang:  [phone]
       OhSan DoJang:  [phone]
       SungNam DoJang:  (0342) 47-6082
       KimPo DoJang:  [phone]

KangWon State;
       ChoonCheon DoJang:  (0361) 53-6783
       KangRyung DoJang:  (0391) 43-1349
       WonJu DoJang:  (0371) 47-0802
       SokCho DoJang:  (0392) 32-0906
       SamChuk DoJang:  (0397) 72-6228

ChoongCheong State;
       TaeJeon DoJang:  [phone]
       TaeJeon DongBu DoJang:  [phone]
       GongJoo DoJang:  (0416) 53-0109
       SeoSan DoJang:  (0455) 65-1713
       CheonAhn DoJang:  (0417) 61-4586
       ChoongJu DoJang:  (0441) 43-6518
       CheongJu DoJang:  (0431) 57-4269
       YoungDong DoJang:  (0414) 43-9742
       JeChun DoJang:  (0443) 45-4010
       JoChiWon DoJang:  [phone]
       DaeChun DoJang:  [phone]
       WonYang DoJang:  [phone]

KyungBuk State;
       TaeGu DoJang:  [phone]
       TaeGu DalSung DoJang:  [phone]
       TaeGu DongBu DoJang:  [phone]
       KyungJu DoJang:  (0561) 43-1581
       GuMi DoJang:  (0546) 53-7441
       SangJu DoJang:  (0582) 34-3048
       AhnDong DoJang:  (0571) 55-9342
       PoHang DoJang:  (0562) 77-1086
       YoungJu DoJang:  (0572) 34-4122
       YoungChun DoJang:  (0563) 34-9251
       JeonChon DoJang:  (0581) 53-0403

KyungNam State;
       BuSan DongLae DoJang:  (051) 83-7740
       BuSan DongBu DoJang:  [phone]
       BuSan SeoBu DoJang:  [phone]
       BuSan Meditation Temple:  [phone]
       SamChunPo DoJang:  (0593) 33-1725
       HamYang DoJang:  (0597) 62-3054
       JinJoo DoJang:  (0591) 53-9891
       KimHae DoJang:  (0525) 32-3162
       WoolSan DoJang:  (0522) 94-4474
       ChangWon DoJang:  (0551) 94-0742
       ChungMoo DoJang:  (0557) 41-2197
       GeoJe DoJang:  [phone]
       JinHae DoJang:  [phone]
       ChangNyung DoJang:  (0559) 33-0660

ChunLa State;
       KwangJoo DoJang:  [phone]
       KwangJoo NamBu DoJang:  [phone]
       CheonJoo DoJang:  (0652) 82-4581
       CheonJoo DukJin DoJang:  (0652) 75-0260
       GunSan DoJang:  (0654) 42-4745
       KimJe DoJang:  [phone]
       YiLee DoJang:  (0653) 54-5605
       JeungYup DoJang:  (0681) 33-6901
       MokPo DoJang:  (0631) 43-0922
       SoonChun DoJang:  [phone]
       YioChun DoJang:  (0662) 81-1422
       YoungKwang DoJang:  (0686) 52-1750
       NamWon DoJang:  (0671) 31-1096

JeJoo State;
       JeJoo DoJang:  (064) 57-5848



JeungSanDo Chanting Meditation







1.  Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting

*      "Sleep less and read Tae-Ul-Ju Chanting.  It is the
Supreme King of Heaven.  For fifty thousand years Tae-Ul-Ju
shall be read by all schools on earth."

Hum-Chi Hum-Chi Tae-Ul-Chun-Sang-Won-Gun
(Take a deep breath)

Hum-Ri-Chi-Ya-Do-Rae Hum-Ri-Ham-Ri-Sa-Pa-Aha.
(Take a deep breath)






2.  Oh-Ju Chanting

*      "This chant contains the energy of Heaven and Earth."

Si-Chun-Gi Ga-Ga-Jang-Se Il-Wol-Il-Wol Man-Sa-Gi

Si-Chun-Ju Jo-Hwa-Jung Young-Se-Bul-Mang-Man-Sa-Gi

Bok-Rok-Sung-Kyung-Shin Su-Myung-Sung-Kyung-Shin Gi-
Ki-Kum-Gi-Won-Wi-Dae-Kang

Myung-Duk Kwan-Um Pal-Um-Pal-Yang Gi-Ki-Kum-Gi-
Won-Wi-Dae-Kang

Sam-Gae-Hae-Ma-Dae-Je-Shin-Wi Won-Jin-Chun-Jon-Kwan
Sung-Je-Gun.


3.  Jel-Hu-Ju Chanting

Dong-Ji So-Han Dae-Han Yip-Chun Woo-Su Kyung-Chip
Chun-Boon Chung-Myung

Gok-Woo Yip-Ha So-Man Mang-Jong Ha-Ji So-Seo Dae-Seo
Yip-Chu

Chue-Seo Baek-Ro Chu-Boon Han-Ro Sang-Kang Yip-Dong
So-Sul Dae-Sul.






4.  Woon-Jang-Ju Chanting

*      "This is the power chant."

Chun-Ha-Young-Woong-Kwan-Woon-Jang
Ui-Mak-Che Gun-Chung Chun-Gi-Pal-Wee-Je-Jang
(Take a deep breath)

Yuk-Jung Yuk-Gap Yuk-Byung Yuk-Ul
So-Sol-Je-Jang Il-Byul-Byung-Young-Sa-Gi
(Take a deep breath)

Um-Um-Kup-Kup Yu-Wul-Lyung Sa-Pa-Aha.
(Take a deep breath)


5.  Gang-Sang-Ju Chanting

Chun-Gang-Sang Ji-Gang-Sang In-Gang-Sang Gang-Sang
Gang-Sang Gang-Sang

Chun-In-Chun-Ji-Chun-Chun Ji-In-Ji-Gi-Ji-Chun In-In-In-Gi-
In-Chun.











6.  Chil-Sung-Kyung Chanting

Chil-Sung-Yu-Rae Dae-Je-Gun Buk-Du-Gu-Jin Jung-Chun-
Dae-Shin

Sang-Jo-Kum-Kwol Ha-Bu-Gon-Lyun Jo-Ri-Kang-Gi Tong-Je-
Gun-Gon

Dae-Kwe-Tam-Rang Moon-Gok-Kwe-Moon Nok-Jon-Yum-
Jung Moo-Gok-Pa-Gun

Go-Sang-Ok-Hwang Ja-Mi-Je-Gun Dae-Ju-Chun-Je Se-Ip-Mi-
Jin

Ha-Je-Bul-Myul Ha-Bok-Bu-Jin Won-Hwang-Jung-Gi Ne-Hap-
Ah-Shin

Chun-Kang-So-Gi Ju-Ya-Sang-Ryun Sok-Ge-So-In (000 000)
Ho-Do-Gu-Ryung

Won-Kyun-Jon-Ui Young-Bo-Jang-Saeng Sam-Tae-Heo-Jung
Yuk-Soon-Gok-Saeng

Saeng-Ah Yang-Ah Ho-Ah Hyung-Ah Heo-Shin-Hyung

Kwy-Jak-Kwan-Haeng Hwa-Bo-Pyu Jon-Je-Kup-Kup Yuo-
Wool-Young.








7.  Jin-Byup-Ju Chanting

Gu-Chun-Ha-Gam-Gi-Wi Jeung-San-Sang-Je-Ha-Gam-Ji-Wi

Jung-Jong-Jo-Ha-Gam-Ji-Wi Myung-Bu-Si-Wang-Uhng-Gam-
Ji-Wi

Oh-Ak-San-Wang-Uhng-Gam-Ji-Wi Sa-Hae-Young-Wang-
Uhng-Gam-Ji-Wi

Sa-Shi-To-Wang-Uhng-Gam-Ji-Wi Jik-Sun-Jo-Ha-Gam-Ji-Wi

Iwe-Sun-Jo-Uhng-Gam-Ji-Wi Choe-Sun-Jo-Uhng-Gam-Ji-Wi

Choe-Iwe-Sun-Jo-Uhng-Gam-Ji-Wi Chil-Sung-Sa-Ja-Rae-Dae-
Ji-Wi

Joa-Chuk-Sa-Ja-Rae-Dae-Ji-Wi Woo-Chuk-Sa-Ja-Rae-Dae-Ji-
Wi

Myung-Boo-Sa-Ja-Rae-Dae-Ji-Wi Chun-Jang-Gil-Bang-Ha-Sah

Yee-Sa-Jin-In-Ha-Si-Ni Mool-Bi-So-Si-Ha-Si-Go

So-Won-Sung-Chee-Ke-Ha-Op-So-Seo.








8.  Gae-Byuk-Ju Chanting

Chun-Sang-Ok-Kyung-Chun-Jon-Shin-Jang Chun-Sang-Ok-
Kyung-Tae-Ul-Shin-Jang

Sang-Ha-Byun-Guk-Rye-Sung-Byuk-Ryuk-Jang-Gun

Baek-Ma-Won-Su-Dae-Jang-Gun Ryu-Sung-Byu-Rak-Jang-
Gun

Ahk-Gyu-Jap-Gyu-Gum-Ran-Jang-Gun Sam-Soo-Sam-Gae-
Do-Won-Soo

Ji-Shin-Byuk-Ryuk-Dae-Jang-Gun Chun-Ji-Jo-Hwa-Poong-
Woon-Shin-Jang

Tae-Guk-Doo-Pa-Pal-Moon-Shin-Jang Yook-Jung-Yook-Gap-
Dun-Gap-Shin-Jang

Sam-Tae-Chil-Sung-Je-Dae-Shin-Jang Yee-Ship-Pal-Su-Je-Wi-
Shin-Jang

Gam-Ah-Mi-Sung Jo-Aha-Dae-Ryuk Yuk-Bal-San Oh-bong

Gu-Chun-Sang-Se-Gun Chik-Sok-Chik-Sok Uhm-Uhm-Gup-
Gup Yeo-Wool-Young.


       This book is the personal property of:

       ■─────────────────────────────────────■

       JeungSanDo is a New Teaching for the Coming New Age.
In this book for the first time the knowledge of JeungSanDo is
being revealed in English.  The knowledge on origin of life itself
is
being taught to us by the Lord Father of the Jesus Christ, Himself.

The Father of the Jesus Christ, the Ruling Lord God of Heaven
and Earth was born on earth in 1871!  His deeds and teachings are
revealed in this book for the first time in English.

*      "In Christianity people wait for the coming of the Jesus, in
Buddhism people wait for the coming of the Maitreya (the Future
Buddha).  Now no matter who comes as long as one person comes,
they would all proclaim that their Teacher has come and follow."
             - The Supreme Lord God JeungSan SangJeNim

       Someday soon there will come a time when this book shall
save your life.  Please read this book with upmost respect,
devotion
and confidence.

       To order a TaeUlJu Meditation Tape, please send a check
or money order in the amount of 12 dollars to;  JeungSanDo, PO
Box 1185, Scarsdale, NY  10583.

 JeungSanDo Temple
 Head Quarter
 123-2 SeoGu, KweJengDong
 TaeJeon City, South Korea
 Tel: 01182 (42) 525-9125

             The New Religion for a New Age